Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

he+has+brought+it+on+himself

81 κρίνω

κρίνω (s. κρίμα; Hom.+) fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα; pf. κέκρικα; plpf. 3 sg. κεκρίκει (on the lack of augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; W-S. §12, 4; Mlt-H. 190; ἐκεκρίκει Just., D. 102, 2). Pass.: impf. ἐκρινόμην; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐκρίθην; pf. κέκριμαι. Primary mng.: ‘to set apart so as to distinguish, separate’, then by transference

① to make a selection, select, prefer (Aeschyl., Suppl. 39 τὶ; Pla., Rep. 3, 399e κρίνειν τινὰ πρό τινος ‘prefer someone to someone’, cp. Phlb. 57e; Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 3 κ. τί τινι=select someth. because of someth. [a place because of its size]; κ. τὸ πρακτέον καὶ μὴ πρακτέον Did., Gen. 27, 3) ὸ̔ς μὲν γὰρ κρίνει ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν the one prefers one day to another Ro 14:5a. In the other half of the sentence ὸ̔ς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, κ. prob. has the sense recognize, approve (X., Hell. 1, 7, 34 ἔκριναν τὴν τῆς βουλῆς γνώμην) the other holds every day in esteem vs. 5b. Closely associated is mng.

② to pass judgment upon (and thereby seek to influence) the lives and actions of other people

ⓐ judge, pass judgment upon, express an opinion about Mt 7:1a, 2a; Lk 6:37a; 1 Cl 13:2; Pol 2:3 (Sextus 183 ὁ κρίνων ἄνθρωπον κρίνεται ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ). κ. δικαίως D 4:3; B 19:11. κ. κατʼ ὄψιν by the outward appearance J 7:24a. κατὰ τὴν σάρκα 8:15. τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κ. pass a right judgment 7:24b (on the expr. cp. Dt 16:18). This is perh. the place for 1 Pt 4:6 ἵνα κριθῶσιν κατὰ ἀνθρ. (s. ESelwyn, comm. ad loc. ref. to Lghtf.; cp. Wsd 3:4).

ⓑ esp. pass an unfavorable judgment upon, criticize, find fault with, condemn (Epict. 2, 21, 11) Ro 2:1abc, 3; 14:3f, 10, 13a (a play on words, w. κρίνειν used in two different mngs. in the same vs.; s. 4 below on vs. 13b); Col 2:16; Js 4:11, 12; D 11:12. μή τι κρίνετε do not pronounce judgment on anything 1 Cor 4:5. ἱνατί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως; why is my freedom (of action) to be unfavorably judged by another person’s scruples? 1 Cor 10:29. μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτόν happy is the one who finds no fault w. himself Ro 14:22.—Also of a human judgment directed against God ὅπως ἂν νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε that you may win when you are judged Ro 3:4 (OMichel in KEK prefers active sense); 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6).

③ to make a judgment based on taking various factors into account, judge, think, consider, look upon w. double acc. of the obj. and the predicate (Soph., Oed. R. 34; Pla., Rep. 9, 578b and s. Cebes 39, 4; 3 Macc 2:33; Just., D. 112, 1) οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτούς you do not consider yourselves worthy Ac 13:46 (Jos., Ant. 6, 159 ὸ̔ν αὐτὸς τ. βασιλείας ἄξιον ἔκρινεν; EpArist 98); cp. PtK 3 p. 15, 17. τὰ ὑστερήματα αὐτῶν ἴδια ἐκρίνετε you considered their shortcomings as your own 1 Cl 2:6. Pass. (Thu. 2, 40, 3; Jos., Ant. 4, 193) τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρʼ ὑμῖν; why do you think it is incredible? Ac 26:8 (Jos., Ant. 18, 76 ἄπιστα αὐτὰ κρίνειν).—Foll. by acc. w. inf. (Pla., Gorg., 452c, Rep. 9, 578b; X., An. 1, 9, 5; 28) κεκρίκατέ με πιστὴν … εἶναι Ac 16:15.—W. inf. foll. κρίνω μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς κτλ. 15:19.—Foll. by τοῦτο ὅτι 2 Cor 5:14.—W. direct quest. foll. ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε judge, decide for yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.—W. indirect quest. foll. (Thu. 4, 130, 7 κρίναντες ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, εἰ … ; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 5) εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν, ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, κρίνατε decide whether it is right to obey you rather than God Ac 4:19.—κρίνατε ὑμεῖς ὅ φημι pass your own judgment on what I say 1 Cor 10:15.—ὀρθῶς ἔκρινας you have judged rightly Lk 7:43.

④ to come to a conclusion after a cognitive process, reach a decision, decide, propose, intend (Isocr. 4, 46; Polyb. 3, 6, 7; 5, 52, 6; 9, 13, 7; Epict. 2, 15, 7; Appian, Bell. Civ. 14, 118 §497 ὅταν οἱ θεοὶ κρίνωσιν; LXX) τί οὖν θέλετε, κρίνατε (restored) so decide now what you wish (to be done); w. inf. (Diod S 4, 33, 10; 17, 95, 1; UPZ 42, 37 [162 B.C.]; PTebt 55, 4 [II B.C.] ἔκρινα γράψαι; PLond III, 897, 11 p. 207 [84 A.D.]; 1 Macc 11:33; 3 Macc 1:6; Jdth 11:13; Wsd 8:9; Jos., Ant.7, 33; 12, 403; 13, 188; Did., Gen. 179, 7) Ac 3:13; 20:16; 25:25; 1 Cor 2:2; 5:3; Tit 3:12. W. τοῦ and inf. (B-D-F §397, 2) ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς Ac 27:1. ἐπεὶ ἤδη σεαυτῷ κέκρικας τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι τὰς ἐντολὰς ταύτας ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπου φυλαχθῆναι since you have already decided in your own mind that these commandments cannot be kept by anyone Hm 12, 3, 6.—W. acc. and inf. (2 Macc 11:25, 36; 3 Macc 6:30; TestSol 10:8; SibOr 3, 127; Just., D. 102, 2) Ac 21:25 (even in the substantially different rdgs.). τοῦτο κέκρικεν …, τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον he has determined this, namely to keep his fiancée (pure and undefiled) 1 Cor 7:37 (s. s.v. γαμίζω 2; Diod S 4, 73, 2 of a father: κρίναι ταύτην [i.e. his daughter] παρθένον διαφυλάττειν). τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα but rather decide this, (namely) to give no offense Ro 14:13b. ἔκρινα ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο, τὸ … ἐλθεῖν 2 Cor 2:1. τὰ δόγματα τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τ. ἀποστόλων Ac 16:4 (cp. Polyb. 5, 52, 6 πράξας τὸ κριθέν; Epict. 2, 15, 7 τοῖς κριθεῖσιν ἐμμένειν δεῖ).

⑤ to engage in a judicial process, judge, decide, hale before a court, condemn, also hand over for judicial punishment, freq. as a legal t.t. (in a forensic sense Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).

ⓐ of a human court

α. act. and pass. abs. Ac 13:27. W. adv. GPt 3:7. κ. τινά: κατὰ τὸν νόμον J 18:31; Ac 23:3; 24:6 v.l. οὐδὲ ἐγὼ κρίνω ὑμᾶς GJs 16:3. Of the right of the apostle and the church to judge believers 1 Cor 5:12ab. μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον; does our law (personified) judge a person? J 7:51 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 50 §205 certain senators desire that before Mark Antony is declared a public enemy he should be brought to trial, ὡς οὐ πάτριον σφίσιν ἀκρίτου καταδικάζειν ‘on the ground that it was not their ancestral custom to condemn someone without a hearing’). ἐκ τ. στόματός σου κρινῶ σε I will punish you on the basis of your own statement Lk 19:22. Pass. Ac 25:10. κρίνεσθαι ἐπί τινι be on trial because of a thing 26:6 (Appian, Basil. 12 κρινόμενος ἐπὶ τῷδε=be brought to trial because of this thing; likew. Iber. 55 §233; Ath. 2, 3; of God ApcrEzk Fgm. d). Also περί τινος (Diod S 12, 30, 5) 23:6; 25:20; w. addition of ἐπί w. gen. of the court of judicature before someone (schol. on Hes., Op. 9) 24:21; 25:9; D 11:11.—τί δὲ καὶ ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον; Lk 12:57, which leads over into the sphere of jurisprudence (vs. 58), means: why cannot you yourselves decide what is right? (cp. the prayer for vengeance fr. Amorgos [BCH 25, 1901 p. 416; Dssm., LO 94=LAE 118] ἐπάκουσον, θεά, καὶ κρῖναι τὸ δίκαιον; cp. Appian, Mithrid. 89 §403 κρίνειν τὴν μάχην=decide the battle; Just., A II, 15, 5).

β. mid. and pass.: ‘dispute, quarrel, debate’, also go to law (so Thu. 4, 122, 4 δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι; Hos 2:4 al. in LXX; TestSol 4:4ff D; Mel., P. 101, 773) τινί with someone (Job 9:3; 13:19) Mt 5:40; B 6:1 (Is 50:8); μετά τινος (Vi. Aesopi W 76 κριθῆναί με μετὰ τῆς κυρίας μου ἐπὶ σοί=I am pleading my case with my mistress before you; Eccl 6:10) 1 Cor 6:6. ἐπί τινος before someone (as judge) vs. 1 (on the beginning of 1 Cor 6 cp. the decree of Alexander to the Greeks in Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21: βούλομαι δὲ μὴ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς κρίνειν ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον, οὐδὲ ἐφʼ οὗ βούλεσθε=it is my wish [will] that you are not to go to law among yourselves, no matter what any of you may have against another, nor before anyone you wish).

ⓑ of the divine tribunal

α. occupied by God or Christ: abs. administer justice, judge J 5:30; 8:16, 50; cp. vs. 26; Rv 6:10; B 5:7. Pass. be judged Mt 7:1b, 2b; Lk 6:37b; Rv 11:18.—W. acc. foll. (PGM 4, 1013 of Horus ὁ κρίνων τὰ πάντα) J 5:22; 8:15b. τοὺς ἔξω 1 Cor 5:13. ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς judge the living and the dead 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; B 7:2. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων Ro 2:16. τὸν κόσμον B 4:12 (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 10 [Stone p. 32]; ApcEsdr 3:3 p. 27, 8 Tdf.). τὴν οἰκουμένην Ac 17:31; AcPl Ha 9, 29. κ. κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον judge each one by what that person does 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Rv 20:13. ἐκρίθησαν οἱ νεκροὶ ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν the dead were judged by what was written in the books (of life and of death), in accordance w. their deeds vs. 12; δικαίως κ. judge uprightly (Sotades [280 B.C.] Fgm. 11, 2 Diehl² II 6 p. 191 [in Stob. 4, 34, 8 vol. V p. 826, 5=Coll. Alex. p. 243] ὁ παντογενὴς … οὐ κρίνει δικαίως) 1 Pt 2:23; B 19:11. Also ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ Rv 19:11. διὰ νόμου κρίνεσθαι be judged on the basis of the law Js 2:12.—Oft. the emphasis is unmistakably laid upon that which follows the Divine Judge’s verdict, upon the condemnation or punishment: condemn, punish (opp. σῴζειν as TestJud 24:6; Mel., P. 104, 810; cp. ApcEsdr 1, 11 p. 25, 3 Tdf. ἐμὲ κρῖνον ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) J 3:17; cp. 18ab; 12:47ab, 48a; cp. 48b; Ac 7:7 (Gen 15:14); Dg 7:5f (opp. ἀγαπᾶν). διὰ νόμου κ. punish on the basis of the law Ro 2:12.—3:6f; 1 Cor 11:31f (here of the temporal punishment which God brings upon sinners); 2 Th 2:12; Hb 10:30 (κρινεῖ κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ the Lord will judge = punish his people is derived fr. Dt 32:36=Ps 134:14, where the judgment of God is spoken of, resulting in the vindication of the innocent [the thought prominent in the two OT pass.] and the punishment of the guilty [the thought prominent in the Hb pass.]); 13:4; Js 5:9; for 1 Pt 4:6 s. 2a above; Rv 18:8; 19:2; B 15:5.—W. the punishment given κ. διὰ πυρός 1 Cl 11:1; διὰ τῶν μαστίγων 17:5. κεκριμένοι ἤδη τῷ θανάτῳ already condemned to death B 10:5. Also εἰς θάνατον condemned to death Hs 9, 18, 2. οἱ κρινόμενοι ἀσεβεῖς the godless, who are condemned 2 Cl 18:1. Of the devil ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται J 16:11.—ταῦτα ἔκρινας you have imposed these punishments Rv 16:5.—On κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα 18:20 s. κρίμα 4.

β. occupied by those who have been divinely commissioned to judge: the 12 apostles judge the 12 tribes Mt 19:28; Lk 22:30 (PBatiffol, RB n.s. 9, 1912, 541–43. But here κ. could have the broader sense rule; cp. 4 Km 15:5; Ps 2:10; 1 Macc 9:73; PsSol 17:29). κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία … σέ the one who is physically uncircumcised will sit in judgment upon you Ro 2:27. οἱ ἅγιοι as judges of the cosmos 1 Cor 6:2ab (κρίνεσθαι ἐν: Diod S 19, 51, 4.—On the saints as co-rulers with God cp. Epict., Ench. 15; Sallust. 21 p. 36, 14) as well as of the angels vs. 3 (cp. Da 7:22).

⑥ to ensure justice for someone, see to it that justice is done (LXX) τινί to someone 1 Cl 8:4 (Is 1:17).—B. 1428. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κρίνω
82 ἴδιος

ἴδιος, ία, ον (Hom.+; s. B-D-F §286; W-S. §22, 17; Rob. 691f; Mlt-Turner 191f.—For the spelling ἵδιος s. on ὀλίγος.)

① pert. to belonging or being related to oneself, one’s own

ⓐ in contrast to what is public property or belongs to another: private, one’s own (exclusively) (opp. κοινός, as Pla., Pol. 7, 535b; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 41 §171; Ath. 25, 4) οὐδὲ εἷς τι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν ἴδιον εἶναι nor did anyone claim that anything the person had was private property or nor did anyone claim ownership of private possessions Ac 4:32; cp. D 4:8.

ⓑ in respect to circumstance or condition belonging to an individual (opp. ἀλλότριος) κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν according to each one’s capability (in contrast to that of others) Mt 25:15. τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰ. ζητεῖ J 7:18; cp. 5:18, 43. ἕκαστος εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν Lk 2:3 v.l. (for ἑαυτοῦ); sim. Mt 9:1 (noting the departure of Jesus to his home territory); cp. Dg 5:2. Christ ἐλευθερώσῃ πᾶσαν σάρκα διὰ τῆς ἰδίας σαρκός AcPlCor 2:6; cp. vs. 16 ἕκαστος τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν Ac 2:8; cp. 1:19 τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ αὐτῶν, without pron. 2:6 (Tat. 26, 1 τὴν ἰ. αὐτῆς … λέξιν); ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει 3:12; cp. 28:30; τἡν ἰ. (δικαιοσύνην) Ro 10:3; cp. 11:24; 14:4f. ἕκαστος τ. ἴ. μισθὸν λήμψεται κατὰ τ. ἴ. κόπον each will receive wages in proportion to each one’s labor 1 Cor 3:8. ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα her own husband 7:2 (Diog. L. 8, 43 πρὸς τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα πορεύεσθαι). ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα 7:7. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴδιον δεῖπνον προλαμβάνει (s. προλαμβάνω 1c) 1 Cor 11:21 (Eratosth.: 241 Fgm. 16 Jac. of the festival known as Lagynophoria τὰ κομισθέντα αὑτοῖς δειπνοῦσι κατακλιθέντες … κ. ἐξ ἰδίας ἕκαστος λαγύνου παρʼ αὑτῶν φέροντες πίνουσιν ‘they dine on the things brought them … and they each drink from a flagon they have personally brought’. Evaluation: συνοίκια ταῦτα ῥυπαρά• ἀνάγκη γὰρ τὴν σύνοδον γίνεσθαι παμμιγοῦς ὄχλου ‘that’s some crummy banquet; it’s certainly a meeting of a motley crew’); cp. 1 Cor 9:7; 15:38. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴ. φορτίον βαστάσει Gal 6:5.—Tit 1:12; Hb 4:10; 7:27; 9:12; 13:12.—J 4:44 s. 2 and 3b.

② pert. to a striking connection or an exclusive relationship, own (with emphasis when expressed orally, or italicized in written form) κοπιῶμεν ταῖς ἰ. χερσίν with our own hands 1 Cor 4:12 (first pers., cp. UPZ 13, 14 [158 B.C.] εἰμὶ μετὰ τ. ἀδελφοῦ ἰδίου=w. my brother; TestJob 34:3 ἀναχωρήσωμεν εἰς τὰς ἰδίας χώρας). ἐν τῷ ἰ. ὀφθαλμῷ in your own eye Lk 6:41; 1 Th 2:14; 2 Pt 3:17 (here the stability of the orthodox is contrasted with loss of direction by those who are misled by error). Ac 1:7 (God’s authority in sharp contrast to the apostles’ interest in determining a schedule of events). ἰ. θέλημα own will and ἰδία καρδία own heart or mind 1 Cor 7:37ab contrast with μὴ ἔχων ἀνάγκην ‘not being under compulsion’; hence ἰ. is not simply equivalent to the possessive gen. in the phrase ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ. 1 Cor 6:18, ἰ. heightens the absurdity of sinning against one’s own body. Lk 10:34 (apparently the storyteller suggests that the wealthy Samaritan had more than one animal, but put his own at the service of the injured traveler). ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. ἐπὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἔμετον Pr 26:11), with heightening of disgust. Some would put J 4:44 here (s. 1 end). εἰς τὸν ἴδιον ἀγρόν Mt 22:5 (the rude guest prefers the amenities of his own estate). Mk 4:34b (Jesus’ close followers in contrast to a large crowd). Ac 25:19 (emphasizing the esoteric nature of sectarian disputes). Js 1:14 (a contrast, not between types of desire but of sources of temptation: those who succumb have only themselves to blame). διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου through his own blood Ac 20:28 (so NRSV mg.; cp. the phrase SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων commonly associated with the gifts of generous officials, s. 4b. That the ‘blood’ would be associated with Jesus would be quite apparent to Luke’s publics).

③ pert. to a person, through substitution for a pronoun, own. Some of the passages cited in 2 may belong here. ἴ. is used for the gen. of αὐτός or the possess. pron., or for the possess. gen. ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῶν (this use found in Hellenistic wr. [Schmidt 369], in Attic [Meisterhans³-Schw. 235] and Magnesian [Thieme 28f] ins; pap [Kuhring—s. ἀνά beg.—14; Mayser II/2, 73f]. S. also Dssm., B 120f [BS 123f], and against him Mlt. 87–91. LXX oft. uses ἴ. without emphasis to render the simple Hebr. personal suffix [Gen 47:18; Dt 15:2; Job 2:11; 7:10, 13; Pr 6:2 al.], but somet. also employs it without any basis for it in the original text [Job 24:12; Pr 9:12; 22:7; 27:15]. Da 1:10, where LXX has ἴ., Theod. uses μου. 1 Esdr 5:8 εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν=2 Esdr 2:1 εἰς πόλιν αὐτοῦ; Mt 9:1 is formally sim., but its position in the narrative suggests placement in 1)

ⓐ with the second pers. (Jos., Bell. 6, 346 ἰδίαις χερσίν=w. your own hands). Eph 5:22 (cp. vs. 28 τὰς ἑαυτῶν γυναῖκας); 1 Th 4:11; 1 Pt 3:1.

ⓑ with the third pers. ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι J 4:44 (cp. ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ: Mt 13:57; Mk 6:4; Lk 4:24, but J 4:44 is expressed in a slightly difft. form and may therefore belong in 1b above); Mt 25:14; 15:20 v.l.; J 1:41 (UPZ 13, s. 2 above: ἀδ. ἴ.); Ac 1:19; 24:24; 1 Ti 6:1; Tit 2:5, 9; 1 Pt 3:5; MPol 17:3; AcPl Ha 3, 21; 4, 27 (context uncertain); τὸ ἴδιον πλάσμα AcPlCor 2:12, 1; ἴδιον χωρίον Papias (3:3).

④ as subst., person or thing associated with an entity

ⓐ associates, relations οἱ ἴδιοι (comrades in battle: Polyaenus, Exc. 14, 20; SIG 709, 19; 22; 2 Macc 12:22; Jos., Bell. 1, 42, Ant. 12, 405; compatriots: ViHab 5 [p. 86, 7 Sch.]; Philo, Mos. 1, 177) fellow-Christians Ac 4:23; 24:23 (Just., D. 121, 3). The disciples (e.g., of a philosopher: Epict. 3, 8, 7) J 13:1. Relatives (BGU 37; POxy 932; PFay 110; 111; 112; 116; 122 al.; Vett. Val. 70, 5 ὑπὸ ἰδίων κ. φίλων; Sir 11:34; Just., A II, 7, 2 σὺν τοῖς ἰδίοις … Νῶε and D. 138, 2 Νῶε … μετὰ τῶν ἰδίων) 1 Ti 5:8; J 1:11b (the worshipers of a god are also so called: Herm. Wr. 1, 31).—Sg. τὸν ἴδιον J 15:19 v.l. (s. b below).

ⓑ home, possessions τὰ ἴδια home (Polyb. 2, 57, 5; 3, 99, 4; Appian, Iber. 23; Peripl. Eryth. 65 εἰς τὰ ἴδια; POxy 4, 9f ἡ ἀνωτέρα ψυχὴ τ. ἴδια γεινώσκει; 487, 18; Esth 5:10; 6:12; 1 Esdr 6:31 [τὰ ἴδια αὐτοῦ=2 Esdr 6:11 ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ]; 3 Macc 6:27, 37; 7:8; Jos., Ant. 8, 405; 416, Bell. 1, 666; 4, 528) J 16:32 (EFascher, ZNW 39, ’41, 171–230); 19:27; Ac 5:18 D; 14:18 v.l.; 21:6; AcPl Ha 8, 5. Many (e.g. Goodsp, Probs. 87f; 94–96; Field, Notes 84; RSV; but not Bultmann 34f; NRSV) prefer this sense for J 1:11a and Lk 18:28; another probability in both these pass. is property, possessions (POxy 489, 4; 490, 3; 491, 3; 492, 4 al.). ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων from his own well-stocked supply (oft. in ins e.g. fr. Magn. and Priene, also SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 [in such ins the focus is on the generosity of public-spirited officals who use their own resources to meet public needs]; Jos., Ant. 12, 158) J 8:44. The sg. can also be used in this way τὸ ἴδιον (SIG 1257, 3; BGU 1118, 31 [22 B.C.]) J 15:19 (v.l. τὸν ἴδιον, s. a above).—τὰ ἴδια one’s own affairs (X., Mem. 3, 4, 12; 2 Macc 9:20; 11:23 v.l., 26, 29) 1 Th 4:11, here πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια=mind your own business.— Jd 6 of one’s proper sphere.

⑤ pert. to a particular individual, by oneself, privately, adv. ἰδίᾳ (Aristoph., Thu.; Diod S 20, 21, 5 et al.; ins, pap, 2 Macc 4:34; Philo; Jos., Bell. 4, 224, C. Ap. 1, 225; Ath. 8, 1f) 1 Cor 12:11; IMg 7:1.—κατʼ ἰδίαν (Machon, Fgm. 11 vs. 121 [in Athen. 8, 349b]; Polyb. 4, 84, 8; Diod S 1, 21, 6; also ins [SIG 1157, 12 καὶ κατὰ κοινὸν καὶ κατʼ ἰδίαν ἑκάστῳ al.]; 2 Macc 4:5; 14:21; JosAs 7:1; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 136; Just., D. 5, 2) privately, by oneself (opp. κοινῇ: Jos., Ant. 4, 310) Mt 14:13, 23; 17:1, 19; 20:17; 24:3; Mk 4:34a; 6:31f; 7:33 (Diod S 18, 49, 2 ἕκαστον ἐκλαμβάνων κατʼ ἰδίαν=‘he took each one aside’); 9:2 (w. μόνος added), 28; 13:3; Lk 9:10; 10:23; Ac 23:19; Gal 2:2 (on the separate meeting cp. Jos., Bell. 2, 199 τ. δυνατοὺς κατʼ ἰδίαν κ. τὸ πλῆθος ἐν κοινῷ συλλέγων; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 40 §170); ISm 7:2.

⑥ pert. to being distinctively characteristic of some entity, belonging to/peculiar to an individual ἕκαστον δένδρον ἐκ τ. ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται every tree is known by its own fruit Lk 6:44. τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα his (own) sheep J 10:3f. εἰς τὸν τόπον τ. ἴδιον to his own place (= the place where he belonged) Ac 1:25; cp. 20:28. The expression τοῦ ἰδίου υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο Ro 8:32 emphasizes the extraordinary nature of God’s gift: did not spare his very own Son (Paul’s association here with the ref. to pandemic generosity, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτο͂ν, contributes a semantic component to ἰ. in this pass.; for the pandemic theme see e.g. OGI 339, 29f; for donation of one’s own resources, ibid. 104; IGR 739, II, 59–62. For the term ὁ ἴδιος υἱός, but in difft. thematic contexts, see e.g. Diod S 17, 80, 1 of Parmenio; 17, 118, 1 of Antipater. In relating an instance in which a son was not spared Polyaenus 8, 13 has υἱὸς αὐτοῦ, evidently without emphasis, but Exc. 3, 7 inserts ἴδιος υἱός to emphasize the gravity of an officer’s own son violating an order.). 1 Cor 7:4ab. ἕκαστος ἐν. τ. ἰδίῳ τάγματι each one in his (own) turn 15:23 (cp. En 2:1 τ. ἰ. τάξιν). καιροὶ ἴδιοι the proper time (cp. Diod S 1, 50, 7 ἐν τοῖς ἰδίοις χρόνοις; likew. 5, 80, 3; Jos., Ant. 11, 171; Ps.-Clemens, Hom. 3, 16; TestSol 6:3 ἐν καιρῷ ἰ.; Just., D. 131, 4 πρὸ τῶν ἰ. καιρῶν; Mel., P. 38, 258ff) 1 Ti 2:6; 6:15; Tit 1:3; 1 Cl 20:4; cp. 1 Ti 3:4f, 12; 4:2; 5:4. ἴδιαι λειτουργίαι … ἴδιος ὁ τόπος … ἴδιαι διακονίαι in each case proper: ministrations, … place, … services 1 Cl 40:5.—In ἰδία ἐπίλυσις 2 Pt 1:20 one’s own private interpretation is contrasted with the meaning intended by the author himself or with the interpretation of another person who is authorized or competent (s. ἐπίλυσις and WWeeda, NThSt 2, 1919, 129–35).—All these pass. are close to mng. 3; it is esp. difficult to fix the boundaries here.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἴδιος
83 Language

   1) The Book of Nature Is Written in the Language of Mathematics

   Philosophy is written in that great book, the universe, which is always open, right before our eyes. But one cannot understand this book without first learning to understand the language and to know the characters in which it is written. It is written in the language of mathematics, and the characters are triangles, circles, and other figures. Without these, one cannot understand a single word of it, and just wanders in a dark labyrinth. (Galileo, 1990, p. 232)

   2) Arranging Speech so as to Reply Appropriately

   It never happens that it [a nonhuman animal] arranges its speech in various ways in order to reply appropriately to everything that may be said in its presence, as even the lowest type of man can do. (Descartes, 1970a, p. 116)

   3) No Other Animal Has the Language Capacity of the Human

   It is a very remarkable fact that there are none so depraved and stupid, without even excepting idiots, that they cannot arrange different words together, forming of them a statement by which they make known their thoughts; while, on the other hand, there is no other animal, however perfect and fortunately circumstanced it may be, which can do the same. (Descartes, 1967, p. 116)

   4) Human Beings Do Not Live Only in the World of Objects

   Human beings do not live in the object world alone, nor alone in the world of social activity as ordinarily understood, but are very much at the mercy of the particular language which has become the medium of expression for their society. It is quite an illusion to imagine that one adjusts to reality essentially without the use of language and that language is merely an incidental means of solving specific problems of communication or reﬂection. The fact of the matter is that the "real world" is to a large extent unconsciously built on the language habits of the group.... We see and hear and otherwise experience very largely as we do because the language habits of our community predispose certain choices of interpretation. (Sapir, 1921, p. 75)

   5) Language Powerfully Conditions All Our Thinking

   It powerfully conditions all our thinking about social problems and processes.... No two languages are ever sufficiently similar to be considered as representing the same social reality. The worlds in which different societies live are distinct worlds, not merely the same worlds with different labels attached. (Sapir, 1985, p. 162)

   6) A List of Language Games

   [A list of language games, not meant to be exhaustive:]

   Giving orders, and obeying them- Describing the appearance of an object, or giving its measurements- Constructing an object from a description (a drawing)Reporting an eventSpeculating about an eventForming and testing a hypothesisPresenting the results of an experiment in tables and diagramsMaking up a story; and reading itPlay actingSinging catchesGuessing riddlesMaking a joke; and telling it

   Solving a problem in practical arithmeticTranslating from one language into another

   LANGUAGE Asking, thanking, cursing, greeting, and praying-. (Wittgenstein, 1953, Pt. I, No. 23, pp. 11 e-12 e)

   7) Language Constrains Certain Modes of Interpretation

   We dissect nature along lines laid down by our native languages.... The world is presented in a kaleidoscopic ﬂux of impressions which has to be organized by our minds-and this means largely by the linguistic systems in our minds.... No individual is free to describe nature with absolute impartiality but is constrained to certain modes of interpretation even while he thinks himself most free. (Whorf, 1956, pp. 153, 213-214)

   8) We Dissect Nature in Accordance with Our Native Languages

   We dissect nature along the lines laid down by our native languages.

   The categories and types that we isolate from the world of phenomena we do not find there because they stare every observer in the face; on the contrary, the world is presented in a kaleidoscopic ﬂux of impressions which has to be organized by our minds-and this means largely by the linguistic systems in our minds.... We are thus introduced to a new principle of relativity, which holds that all observers are not led by the same physical evidence to the same picture of the universe, unless their linguistic backgrounds are similar or can in some way be calibrated. (Whorf, 1956, pp. 213-214)

   9) The Forms of a Person's Thoughts Are Controlled by Unperceived Patterns of His Own Language

   The forms of a person's thoughts are controlled by inexorable laws of pattern of which he is unconscious. These patterns are the unperceived intricate systematizations of his own language-shown readily enough by a candid comparison and contrast with other languages, especially those of a different linguistic family. (Whorf, 1956, p. 252)

    10) The Analysis of Certain Types of Utterances

   It has come to be commonly held that many utterances which look like statements are either not intended at all, or only intended in part, to record or impart straightforward information about the facts.... Many traditional philosophical perplexities have arisen through a mistake-the mistake of taking as straightforward statements of fact utterances which are either (in interesting non-grammatical ways) nonsensical or else intended as something quite different. (Austin, 1962, pp. 2-3)

    11) The Dictionary of a Language Is a System of Concepts

   In general, one might define a complex of semantic components connected by logical constants as a concept. The dictionary of a language is then a system of concepts in which a phonological form and certain syntactic and morphological characteristics are assigned to each concept. This system of concepts is structured by several types of relations. It is supplemented, furthermore, by redundancy or implicational rules..., representing general properties of the whole system of concepts.... At least a relevant part of these general rules is not bound to particular languages, but represents presumably universal structures of natural languages. They are not learned, but are rather a part of the human ability to acquire an arbitrary natural language. (Bierwisch, 1970, pp. 171-172)

    12) Talk about the Evolution of the Language Capacity is Beside the Point

   In studying the evolution of mind, we cannot guess to what extent there are physically possible alternatives to, say, transformational generative grammar, for an organism meeting certain other physical conditions characteristic of humans. Conceivably, there are none-or very few-in which case talk about evolution of the language capacity is beside the point. (Chomsky, 1972, p. 98)

    13) The Development of Language

   [It is] truth value rather than syntactic well-formedness that chieﬂy governs explicit verbal reinforcement by parents-which renders mildly paradoxical the fact that the usual product of such a training schedule is an adult whose speech is highly grammatical but not notably truthful. (R. O. Brown, 1973, p. 330)

    14) Sentential and Conceptual Levels in Language

   he conceptual base is responsible for formally representing the concepts underlying an utterance.... A given word in a language may or may not have one or more concepts underlying it.... On the sentential level, the utterances of a given language are encoded within a syntactic structure of that language. The basic construction of the sentential level is the sentence.

   The next highest level... is the conceptual level. We call the basic construction of this level the conceptualization. A conceptualization consists of concepts and certain relations among those concepts. We can consider that both levels exist at the same point in time and that for any unit on one level, some corresponding realizate exists on the other level. This realizate may be null or extremely complex.... Conceptualizations may relate to other conceptualizations by nesting or other specified relationships. (Schank, 1973, pp. 191-192)

    15) Linguistic Realities Have Not Yet Been Captured by Theoretical Models

   The mathematics of multi-dimensional interactive spaces and lattices, the projection of "computer behavior" on to possible models of cerebral functions, the theoretical and mechanical investigation of artificial intelligence, are producing a stream of sophisticated, often suggestive ideas.

   But it is, I believe, fair to say that nothing put forward until now in either theoretic design or mechanical mimicry comes even remotely in reach of the most rudimentary linguistic realities. (Steiner, 1975, p. 284)

    16) The Final Steps to Human Language

   The step from the simple tool to the master tool, a tool to make tools (what we would now call a machine tool), seems to me indeed to parallel the final step to human language, which I call reconstitution. It expresses in a practical and social context the same understanding of hierarchy, and shows the same analysis by function as a basis for synthesis. (Bronowski, 1977, pp. 127-128)

    17) The Inadequacy of Formal Linguistic Models for Ordinary Language Usage

    t is the language donn eґ in which we conduct our lives.... We have no other. And the danger is that formal linguistic models, in their loosely argued analogy with the axiomatic structure of the mathematical sciences, may block perception.... It is quite conceivable that, in language, continuous induction from simple, elemental units to more complex, realistic forms is not justified. The extent and formal "undecidability" of context-and every linguistic particle above the level of the phoneme is context-bound-may make it impossible, except in the most abstract, meta-linguistic sense, to pass from "pro-verbs," "kernals," or "deep deep structures" to actual speech. (Steiner, 1975, pp. 111-113)

    18) When a Language Is an Abstract Machine

   A higher-level formal language is an abstract machine. (Weizenbaum, 1976, p. 113)

    19) Metaphor and Metonymy Underpin the Formation of Linguistic Signs

   Jakobson sees metaphor and metonymy as the characteristic modes of binarily opposed polarities which between them underpin the two-fold process of selection and combination by which linguistic signs are formed.... Thus messages are constructed, as Saussure said, by a combination of a "horizontal" movement, which combines words together, and a "vertical" movement, which selects the particular words from the available inventory or "inner storehouse" of the language. The combinative (or syntagmatic) process manifests itself in contiguity (one word being placed next to another) and its mode is metonymic. The selective (or associative) process manifests itself in similarity (one word or concept being "like" another) and its mode is metaphoric. The "opposition" of metaphor and metonymy therefore may be said to represent in effect the essence of the total opposition between the synchronic mode of language (its immediate, coexistent, "vertical" relationships) and its diachronic mode (its sequential, successive, lineal progressive relationships). (Hawkes, 1977, pp. 77-78)

    20) Language and the Analysis of Nature

   It is striking that the layered structure that man has given to language constantly reappears in his analyses of nature. (Bronowski, 1977, p. 121)

    21) Correspondence Rules for Mapping Old Theory into Subsets of New Theory

   First, [an ideal intertheoretic reduction] provides us with a set of rules"correspondence rules" or "bridge laws," as the standard vernacular has it-which effect a mapping of the terms of the old theory (T o) onto a subset of the expressions of the new or reducing theory (T n). These rules guide the application of those selected expressions of T n in the following way: we are free to make singular applications of their correspondencerule doppelgangers in T o....

   Second, and equally important, a successful reduction ideally has the outcome that, under the term mapping effected by the correspondence rules, the central principles of T o (those of semantic and systematic importance) are mapped onto general sentences of T n that are theorems of Tn. (P. Churchland, 1979, p. 81)

    22) The Inclusion of Non- linguistic Factors in a Theory of Grammar

   If non-linguistic factors must be included in grammar: beliefs, attitudes, etc. [this would] amount to a rejection of the initial idealization of language as an object of study. A priori such a move cannot be ruled out, but it must be empirically motivated. If it proves to be correct, I would conclude that language is a chaos that is not worth studying.... Note that the question is not whether beliefs or attitudes, and so on, play a role in linguistic behavior and linguistic judgments... [but rather] whether distinct cognitive structures can be identified, which interact in the real use of language and linguistic judgments, the grammatical system being one of these. (Chomsky, 1979, pp. 140, 152-153)

    23) Language Is Inevitably Inﬂuenced by Specific Contexts of Human Interaction

   Language cannot be studied in isolation from the investigation of "rationality." It cannot afford to neglect our everyday assumptions concerning the total behavior of a reasonable person.... An integrational linguistics must recognize that human beings inhabit a communicational space which is not neatly compartmentalized into language and nonlanguage.... It renounces in advance the possibility of setting up systems of forms and meanings which will "account for" a central core of linguistic behavior irrespective of the situation and communicational purposes involved. (Harris, 1981, p. 165)

    24) The Genetic Blueprints of Language

   By innate [linguistic knowledge], Chomsky simply means "genetically programmed." He does not literally think that children are born with language in their heads ready to be spoken. He merely claims that a "blueprint is there, which is brought into use when the child reaches a certain point in her general development. With the help of this blueprint, she analyzes the language she hears around her more readily than she would if she were totally unprepared for the strange gabbling sounds which emerge from human mouths. (Aitchison, 1987, p. 31)

    25) Languages Are Machines

   Looking at ourselves from the computer viewpoint, we cannot avoid seeing that natural language is our most important "programming language." This means that a vast portion of our knowledge and activity is, for us, best communicated and understood in our natural language.... One could say that natural language was our first great original artifact and, since, as we increasingly realize, languages are machines, so natural language, with our brains to run it, was our primal invention of the universal computer. One could say this except for the sneaking suspicion that language isn't something we invented but something we became, not something we constructed but something in which we created, and recreated, ourselves. (Leiber, 1991, p. 8)

Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Language
84 Philosophy

   1) There Are Ideas That Have Their Own True and Immutable Nature

   And what I believe to be more important here is that I find in myself an infinity of ideas of certain things which cannot be assumed to be pure nothingness, even though they may have perhaps no existence outside of my thought. These things are not figments of my imagination, even though it is within my power to think of them or not to think of them; on the contrary, they have their own true and immutable natures. Thus, for example, when I imagine a triangle, even though there may perhaps be no such figure anywhere in the world outside of my thought, nor ever have been, nevertheless the figure cannot help having a certain determinate nature... or essence, which is immutable and eternal, which I have not invented and which does not in any way depend upon my mind. (Descartes, 1951, p. 61)

   2) Examine What Is within Our Reach

   Let us console ourselves for not knowing the possible connections between a spider and the rings of Saturn, and continue to examine what is within our reach. (Voltaire, 1961, p. 144)

   3) Modern Philosophy Starts with the Cartesian Catastrophe

   As modern physics started with the Newtonian revolution, so modern philosophy starts with what one might call the Cartesian Catastrophe. The catastrophe consisted in the splitting up of the world into the realms of matter and mind, and the identification of "mind" with conscious thinking. The result of this identification was the shallow rationalism of l'esprit Cartesien, and an impoverishment of psychology which it took three centuries to remedy even in part. (Koestler, 1964, p. 148)

   4) The Rightful Claims of Philosophy

   It has been made of late a reproach against natural philosophy that it has struck out on a path of its own, and has separated itself more and more widely from the other sciences which are united by common philological and historical studies. The opposition has, in fact, been long apparent, and seems to me to have grown up mainly under the inﬂuence of the Hegelian philosophy, or, at any rate, to have been brought out into more distinct relief by that philosophy.... The sole object of Kant's "Critical Philosophy" was to test the sources and the authority of our knowledge, and to fix a definite scope and standard for the researches of philosophy, as compared with other sciences.... [But Hegel's] "Philosophy of Identity" was bolder. It started with the hypothesis that not only spiritual phenomena, but even the actual world-nature, that is, and man-were the result of an act of thought on the part of a creative mind, similar, it was supposed, in kind to the human mind.... The philosophers accused the scientific men of narrowness; the scientific men retorted that the philosophers were crazy. And so it came about that men of science began to lay some stress on the banishment of all philosophic inﬂuences from their work; while some of them, including men of the greatest acuteness, went so far as to condemn philosophy altogether, not merely as useless, but as mischievous dreaming. Thus, it must be confessed, not only were the illegitimate pretensions of the Hegelian system to subordinate to itself all other studies rejected, but no regard was paid to the rightful claims of philosophy, that is, the criticism of the sources of cognition, and the definition of the functions of the intellect. (Helmholz, quoted in Dampier, 1966, pp. 291-292)

   5) The Philosophy of Philosophy

   Philosophy remains true to its classical tradition by renouncing it. (Habermas, 1972, p. 317)

   6) Philosophy Is a Field Which Has Certain Central Questions

   I have not attempted... to put forward any grand view of the nature of philosophy; nor do I have any such grand view to put forth if I would. It will be obvious that I do not agree with those who see philosophy as the history of "howlers" and progress in philosophy as the debunking of howlers. It will also be obvious that I do not agree with those who see philosophy as the enterprise of putting forward a priori truths about the world.... I see philosophy as a field which has certain central questions, for example, the relation between thought and reality.... It seems obvious that in dealing with these questions philosophers have formulated rival research programs, that they have put forward general hypotheses, and that philosophers within each major research program have modified their hypotheses by trial and error, even if they sometimes refuse to admit that that is what they are doing. To that extent philosophy is a "science." To argue about whether philosophy is a science in any more serious sense seems to me to be hardly a useful occupation.... It does not seem to me important to decide whether science is philosophy or philosophy is science as long as one has a conception of both that makes both essential to a responsible view of the world and of man's place in it. (Putnam, 1975, p. xvii)

   7) The Central Task of Philosophy

   What can philosophy contribute to solving the problem of the relation [of] mind to body? Twenty years ago, many English-speaking philosophers would have answered: "Nothing beyond an analysis of the various mental concepts." If we seek knowledge of things, they thought, it is to science that we must turn. Philosophy can only cast light upon our concepts of those things.

   This retreat from things to concepts was not undertaken lightly. Ever since the seventeenth century, the great intellectual fact of our culture has been the incredible expansion of knowledge both in the natural and in the rational sciences (mathematics, logic).

   The success of science created a crisis in philosophy. What was there for philosophy to do? Hume had already perceived the problem in some degree, and so surely did Kant, but it was not until the twentieth century, with the Vienna Circle and with Wittgenstein, that the difficulty began to weigh heavily. Wittgenstein took the view that philosophy could do no more than strive to undo the intellectual knots it itself had tied, so achieving intellectual release, and even a certain illumination, but no knowledge. A little later, and more optimistically, Ryle saw a positive, if reduced role, for philosophy in mapping the "logical geography" of our concepts: how they stood to each other and how they were to be analyzed....

   Since that time, however, philosophers in the "analytic" tradition have swung back from Wittgensteinian and even Rylean pessimism to a more traditional conception of the proper role and tasks of philosophy. Many analytic philosophers now would accept the view that the central task of philosophy is to give an account, or at least play a part in giving an account, of the most general nature of things and of man. (Armstrong, 1990, pp. 37-38)

   8) Philosophy's Evolving Engagement with Artificial Intelligence and Cognitive Science

   In the beginning, the nature of philosophy's engagement with artificial intelligence and cognitive science was clear enough. The new sciences of the mind were to provide the long-awaited vindication of the most potent dreams of naturalism and materialism. Mind would at last be located firmly within the natural order. We would see in detail how the most perplexing features of the mental realm could be supported by the operations of solely physical laws upon solely physical stuff. Mental causation (the power of, e.g., a belief to cause an action) would emerge as just another species of physical causation. Reasoning would be understood as a kind of automated theorem proving. And the key to both was to be the depiction of the brain as the implementation of multiple higher level programs whose task was to manipulate and transform symbols or representations: inner items with one foot in the physical (they were realized as brain states) and one in the mental (they were bearers of contents, and their physical gymnastics were cleverly designed to respect semantic relationships such as truth preservation). (A. Clark, 1996, p. 1)

   9) The Enduring Value of Philosophy

   Socrates of Athens famously declared that "the unexamined life is not worth living," and his motto aptly explains the impulse to philosophize. Taking nothing for granted, philosophy probes and questions the fundamental presuppositions of every area of human inquiry.... [P]art of the job of the philosopher is to keep at a certain critical distance from current doctrines, whether in the sciences or the arts, and to examine instead how the various elements in our world-view clash, or fit together. Some philosophers have tried to incorporate the results of these inquiries into a grand synoptic view of the nature of reality and our human relationship to it. Others have mistrusted system-building, and seen their primary role as one of clarifications, or the removal of obstacles along the road to truth. But all have shared the Socratic vision of using the human intellect to challenge comfortable preconceptions, insisting that every aspect of human theory and practice be subjected to continuing critical scrutiny....

   Philosophy is, of course, part of a continuing tradition, and there is much to be gained from seeing how that tradition originated and developed. But the principal object of studying the materials in this book is not to pay homage to past genius, but to enrich one's understanding of central problems that are as pressing today as they have always been-problems about knowledge, truth and reality, the nature of the mind, the basis of right action, and the best way to live. These questions help to mark out the territory of philosophy as an academic discipline, but in a wider sense they define the human predicament itself; they will surely continue to be with us for as long as humanity endures. (Cottingham, 1996, pp. xxi-xxii)

    10) The Distinction between Dionysian Man and Apollonian Man, between Art and Creativity and Reason and Self- Control

   In his study of ancient Greek culture, The Birth of Tragedy, Nietzsche drew what would become a famous distinction, between the Dionysian spirit, the untamed spirit of art and creativity, and the Apollonian, that of reason and self-control. The story of Greek civilization, and all civilizations, Nietzsche implied, was the gradual victory of Apollonian man, with his desire for control over nature and himself, over Dionysian man, who survives only in myth, poetry, music, and drama. Socrates and Plato had attacked the illusions of art as unreal, and had overturned the delicate cultural balance by valuing only man's critical, rational, and controlling consciousness while denigrating his vital life instincts as irrational and base. The result of this division is "Alexandrian man," the civilized and accomplished Greek citizen of the later ancient world, who is "equipped with the greatest forces of knowledge" but in whom the wellsprings of creativity have dried up. (Herman, 1997, pp. 95-96)

Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Philosophy
85 נתר I

נָתַרI (b. h.; cmp. נתק) to sever, loosen. Nif. נִיתַּר, נִיתּוֹר 1) to be torn loose, be released. Y.Taan.II, 65d top, v. נָטַש II a. נָתש.Trnsf. to be untied, released from an obligation; to become permitted. Y.Yeb.IV, 6b bot. (ref. to Deut. 25:10) בית שהוא נִיתָּרוכ׳ a house (of several wives) which is released (from the leviratical marriage) by means of one ḥălitsah (performed on one of the wives). Y.Bicc.I, 64b top כל הביכורים שנראו לִיתּוֹר … אינן נִיתּוֹרִיןוכ׳ all the first fruits whioh are to be released (become permitted by being brought to the Temple) in the land (of Palestine), can become so only by reciting the confession (Deut. 26:5–10). Erub.10a; 12a חצר נִיתֶּרֶתוכ׳ a court becomes permitted (for Sabbath purposes) by, v. פַּס. Ib. שהוא נִיתָּרוכ׳ that it is made available ; a. e. Hif. הִתִּיר 1) to loosen, untie, unscrew. Tosef.Sabb.XVI (XVII), 5 שהִתִּירוֹ which one unscrewed; Sabb.XX, 5 מַתִּירִין, v. מַכְבֵּש. Ib. 22a מתירין (ציצית) מבגד לבגד you may untie show-fringes from one garment (and put them) on another garment. Gen. R. s. 5 מַתִּירָן ומוציאוכ׳ he unties them (opens the bags) and lets the air in them escape; a. fr.Tosef.Shebi.I, 7, v. וָתַר. 2) to permit, declare permitted, opp. אָסַר. Sabb.4a הִתִּירוּ לווכ׳ would they (the scholars) permit him to take it out ? Ib. II, 4 ור׳ יהודה מַתִּיר but R. Judah declares it permitted. Ib. 2 וחכמים מַתִּירִין; a. v. fr.V. מַתִּיר. 3) to free, surrender; to outlaw, proscribe. Snh.40b ה׳ עצמו למיתה did he surrender himself to death?, i. e. did he declare that he would commit the act in spite of the warning which defined it to be a deadly crime? Ib. 41a (ref. to Deut. 17:6) עד שיַתִּירוכ׳ until he declares himself ready to undergo capital punishment for his act Ḥull.41a. Y.Peah I, 16a עילא … להַתִּיר דמןוכ׳ they wanted a pretext to outlaw the rebels; a. fr. Hof. הוּתָּר 1) to be loosened, untied. Lev. R. s. 28, beg., a. fr. הוּתְּרָה הרצועה v. רְצוּעָה. Sabb.XX, 5 אם היה מוּתָּרוכ׳ if it (the clothes press) was (partly) unscrewed on the eve of the Sabbath, he may unscrew it entirely. B. Kam.9b שור מותר an ox that is not tied, opp. קשור. Erub.II, 1 קשורות אבל לא מוּתָּרוֹת closely tied together, but not tied in a loose way; a. e. 2) to be permitted. Y.Sabb.II, 5b bot. ה׳ הנדר, v. נֶדֶר; Snh.68a. Ḥull.17a בתחילהה׳ להןוכ׳ originally they were permitted to eat the flesh of an animal killed by stabbing (v. נְחִירָה). Ib. 9a נשחטה הותרה when the animal has been slaughtered according to the ritual, it is (absolutely) permitted. Erub.93b שבת ביון שהותרה הותרה as regards Sabbath laws what has been permitted at the entrance of the Sabbath remains permitted the entire day; ib. 70b כל שה׳ למקצתוכ׳ whatever is permitted for one part of the Sabbath ; a. v. fr.Part. מוּתָּר; f. מוּתֶּרֶת; pl. מוּתָּרִים, מוּתָּרִין; מוּתָּרוֹת (it is, they are) permitted (of things and persons). Ter. X, 7. Yeb.I, 2 צרתה מ׳ her rival is permitted (to him as wife). Ib. III, 2 ומ׳ באחותה and he is permitted to marry her sister. Ib. II, 10 מותרות לינשא להן may be married to them; a. v. fr.Pes.48a, a. e. (ref. to ממשקה ישראל, Ez. 45:15) מן המותר לישראל of what an Israelite is permitted to drink. Sabb.108a (ref. to בפיך, Ex. 13:9) מדבר המותר בפיך the Torah must be written on the skin of an animal which is permitted in thy mouth (a clean animal).

Jewish literature > נתר I
86 נָתַר

נָתַרI (b. h.; cmp. נתק) to sever, loosen. Nif. נִיתַּר, נִיתּוֹר 1) to be torn loose, be released. Y.Taan.II, 65d top, v. נָטַש II a. נָתש.Trnsf. to be untied, released from an obligation; to become permitted. Y.Yeb.IV, 6b bot. (ref. to Deut. 25:10) בית שהוא נִיתָּרוכ׳ a house (of several wives) which is released (from the leviratical marriage) by means of one ḥălitsah (performed on one of the wives). Y.Bicc.I, 64b top כל הביכורים שנראו לִיתּוֹר … אינן נִיתּוֹרִיןוכ׳ all the first fruits whioh are to be released (become permitted by being brought to the Temple) in the land (of Palestine), can become so only by reciting the confession (Deut. 26:5–10). Erub.10a; 12a חצר נִיתֶּרֶתוכ׳ a court becomes permitted (for Sabbath purposes) by, v. פַּס. Ib. שהוא נִיתָּרוכ׳ that it is made available ; a. e. Hif. הִתִּיר 1) to loosen, untie, unscrew. Tosef.Sabb.XVI (XVII), 5 שהִתִּירוֹ which one unscrewed; Sabb.XX, 5 מַתִּירִין, v. מַכְבֵּש. Ib. 22a מתירין (ציצית) מבגד לבגד you may untie show-fringes from one garment (and put them) on another garment. Gen. R. s. 5 מַתִּירָן ומוציאוכ׳ he unties them (opens the bags) and lets the air in them escape; a. fr.Tosef.Shebi.I, 7, v. וָתַר. 2) to permit, declare permitted, opp. אָסַר. Sabb.4a הִתִּירוּ לווכ׳ would they (the scholars) permit him to take it out ? Ib. II, 4 ור׳ יהודה מַתִּיר but R. Judah declares it permitted. Ib. 2 וחכמים מַתִּירִין; a. v. fr.V. מַתִּיר. 3) to free, surrender; to outlaw, proscribe. Snh.40b ה׳ עצמו למיתה did he surrender himself to death?, i. e. did he declare that he would commit the act in spite of the warning which defined it to be a deadly crime? Ib. 41a (ref. to Deut. 17:6) עד שיַתִּירוכ׳ until he declares himself ready to undergo capital punishment for his act Ḥull.41a. Y.Peah I, 16a עילא … להַתִּיר דמןוכ׳ they wanted a pretext to outlaw the rebels; a. fr. Hof. הוּתָּר 1) to be loosened, untied. Lev. R. s. 28, beg., a. fr. הוּתְּרָה הרצועה v. רְצוּעָה. Sabb.XX, 5 אם היה מוּתָּרוכ׳ if it (the clothes press) was (partly) unscrewed on the eve of the Sabbath, he may unscrew it entirely. B. Kam.9b שור מותר an ox that is not tied, opp. קשור. Erub.II, 1 קשורות אבל לא מוּתָּרוֹת closely tied together, but not tied in a loose way; a. e. 2) to be permitted. Y.Sabb.II, 5b bot. ה׳ הנדר, v. נֶדֶר; Snh.68a. Ḥull.17a בתחילהה׳ להןוכ׳ originally they were permitted to eat the flesh of an animal killed by stabbing (v. נְחִירָה). Ib. 9a נשחטה הותרה when the animal has been slaughtered according to the ritual, it is (absolutely) permitted. Erub.93b שבת ביון שהותרה הותרה as regards Sabbath laws what has been permitted at the entrance of the Sabbath remains permitted the entire day; ib. 70b כל שה׳ למקצתוכ׳ whatever is permitted for one part of the Sabbath ; a. v. fr.Part. מוּתָּר; f. מוּתֶּרֶת; pl. מוּתָּרִים, מוּתָּרִין; מוּתָּרוֹת (it is, they are) permitted (of things and persons). Ter. X, 7. Yeb.I, 2 צרתה מ׳ her rival is permitted (to him as wife). Ib. III, 2 ומ׳ באחותה and he is permitted to marry her sister. Ib. II, 10 מותרות לינשא להן may be married to them; a. v. fr.Pes.48a, a. e. (ref. to ממשקה ישראל, Ez. 45:15) מן המותר לישראל of what an Israelite is permitted to drink. Sabb.108a (ref. to בפיך, Ex. 13:9) מדבר המותר בפיך the Torah must be written on the skin of an animal which is permitted in thy mouth (a clean animal).

Jewish literature > נָתַר
87 faire

faire [fεʀ]

━━━━━━━━━

1. transitive verb

2. intransitive verb

3. impersonal verb

4. auxiliary verb

5. reflexive verb

━━━━━━━━━

➭ TABLE 60

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque faire est suivi d'un nom dans une locution comme faire une faute, se faire des idées, reportez-vous à l'autre mot.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

1. <

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque faire est utilisé pour parler d'une activité non précisée, ou qu'il remplace un verbe plus spécifique, il se traduit par to do. Lorsque faire veut dire créer, préparer, fabriquer, il se traduit souvent par to make.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

   a. (activité non précisée) to do

• que fais-tu ce soir ? what are you doing tonight?

• je n'ai rien à faire I have nothing to do

• que voulez-vous qu'on y fasse ? what can be done about it?

• faire la chambre to do the room

• faire 10 km to do 10km

• faire 100 km/h to do 100km/h

• on a fait Lyon-Paris en cinq heures we did Lyon to Paris in five hours

• je n'en ferai rien ! I'll do nothing of the sort!

► faire de ( = utiliser) to do with

• je ne sais pas quoi faire de mon temps libre I don't know what to do with my spare time

• qu'avez-vous fait de votre sac ? what have you done with your bag?► ne faire que

• il ne fait que se plaindre he's always complaining

• il ne fait que bavarder he won't stop chattering

• je ne fais que passer I'm just passing

   b. (School) [+ devoirs, matière, auteur] to do

• faire de l'allemand to do German

• faire l'école hôtelière to go to a catering school

   c. ( = créer, préparer, fabriquer) to make

• faire un film to make a film

• faire de la confiture to make jam

   d. ( = constituer) c'est ce qui fait tout son charme that's what makes him so charming

   e. (Sport) [+ football, tennis, rugby] to play ; [+ sport de combat] to do

• faire du sport to do sport

• faire du judo to do judo

• faire de la boxe to box

   f. (Music) ( = jouer) to play

• faire du piano/du violon to play the piano/the violin

   g. (Medicine) [+ diabète, attaque] to have

• faire de la tension to have high blood pressure

   h. ( = chercher dans) il a fait toute la ville pour en trouver he's been all over town looking for some

   i. ( = vendre) nous ne faisons pas cette marque we don't stock that make

• je vous le fais à 700 € I'll let you have it for 700 euros

   j. ( = mesurer, peser, coûter) to be

• la cuisine fait 6 mètres de large the kitchen is 6 metres wide

• combien fait cette chaise ? how much is this chair?

• ça fait 130 € that's 130 euros

• deux et deux font quatre two and two is four

• cela fait combien en tout ? how much is that altogether?

   k. ( = agir sur, importer) ils ne peuvent rien me faire they can't do anything to me

• on ne me la fait pas à moi ! (inf) I wasn't born yesterday!

• qu'est-ce que cela peut bien te faire ? what's it to you?

• qu'est-ce que ça fait ? so what? (inf)

• cela ne vous ferait rien de sortir ? would you mind leaving the room?

   l. ( = imiter) il a fait celui qui ne comprenait pas he pretended not to understand

• ne fais pas l'enfant/l'idiot don't be so childish/so stupid

   m. ( = être, servir de) [personne] to be ; [acteur] to play ; [objet] to be used as

• tu fais l'arbitre ? will you be referee?

• cet hôtel fait aussi restaurant the hotel has its own restaurant

• quel imbécile je fais ! what a fool I am!

• il fera un bon avocat he'll make a good lawyer

   n. ( = dire) to say

• « vraiment ? » fit-il "really?" he said

• le chat fait miaou the cat goes miaow

   o. (Grammar) « canal » fait »canaux » au pluriel the plural of "canal" is "canaux"

2. <

   a. (remplaçant un autre verbe) to do

• as-tu payé la note ? -- non, c'est lui qui l'a fait did you pay the bill? -- no, he did

• puis-je téléphoner ? -- faites, je vous en prie could I use the phone? -- yes, of course

   b. ( = agir) faire vite to act quickly

• faites vite ! be quick!

• faites comme chez vous make yourself at home

   c. ( = paraître) to look

• ce vase fait bien sur la table the vase looks nice on the table

• faire vieux to look old

• faire jeune to look young

   d. (besoins naturels) (inf) [personne] to go ; [animal] to do its business

3. <

► il fait

• il fait nuit it is dark

• il faut chaud it is hot

• il fait bon vivre ici this is a nice place to be

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► since et for ne se construisent pas avec le même temps.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► cela or ça fait... que

• cela fait très longtemps que je ne l'ai pas vu I haven't seen him for a very long time it's a long time since I saw him

• ça fait trois ans qu'il est parti it's three years since he left he's been gone for three years

• ça fait que... that means...

4. <

   a. ( = pousser à) to make

• ça m'a fait pleurer it made me cry

• il lui a fait boire du whisky he made her drink some whisky

• ce genre de musique me fait dormir that kind of music puts me to sleep

• j'ai fait démarrer la voiture I got the car started

• faire réparer une montre to have a watch repaired

• elle a fait tomber une tasse she knocked a cup over

► faire faire

• faire faire qch par qn to get sth made (or done) by sb

• faire faire qch à qn to get sb to do (or to make) sth ; (en le forçant) to make sb do (or make) sth

• se faire faire une robe to have a dress made

   b. ( = aider à) faire traverser la rue à un aveugle to help a blind man across the road

• faire manger un patient to feed a patient

   c. ( = laisser) faire entrer qn (qn que l'on attendait) to let sb in ; (qn que l'on n'attendait pas) to ask sb in

• faire venir le médecin to call the doctor

5. <

► se faire

   a. (pour soi)

il s'est fait beaucoup d'ennemis he has made a great many enemies

   b. ( = être fait) si ça doit se faire, ça se fera sans moi if it's going to happen, it'll happen without me

   c. ( = être convenable, courant) ça se fait d'offrir des fleurs à un homme ? is it OK to give flowers to a man?

• cela ne se fait pas it's not done

   d. (locutions)

► se faire + adjectif (involontairement) to get ; (volontairement) to make o.s.

• se faire vieux to be getting old

• il se faisait tard it was getting late

• se faire beau to make o.s. look nice

• sa voix se fit plus douce his voice became softer► se faire + infinitif

• il se faisait apporter le journal tous les matins he had the paper brought to him every morning

• fais-toi expliquer le règlement get someone to explain the rules to you

• se faire couper les cheveux to have one's hair cut

• je me suis fait couper les cheveux I've had my hair cut

• il s'est fait attaquer par deux jeunes he was attacked by two youths

• elle s'est fait renvoyer she was sacked

• tu vas te faire gronder you'll get yourself into trouble

• faut se le faire ! (inf!) he's a real pain in the neck! (inf)► se faire à ( = s'habituer à) to get used to

• il ne se fait pas au climat he can't get used to the climate► s'en faire to worry

• ne t'en fais pas don't worry

• il ne s'en fait pas ! he's got a nerve!► il se fait que

• il pourrait se faire qu'il pleuve it might rain

• comment se fait-il qu'il soit absent ? how come he's not here? (inf)

* * *
fɛʀ
1.

verbe transitif

1) ( produire) to make

trois et deux font cinq — three and two make five

combien font 13 fois 13? — what's 13 times 13?

œil fait yeux au pluriel — œil is yeux in the plural

2) ( façonner) to shape [histoire, période]

3) ( étudier) to do [licence, sujet]

faire du violon — to study ou play the violin

tu as fait ton piano? — have you practised your piano?

faire une école de commerce — to go to business school

4) ( préparer) to make [soupe, thé]; to prepare [salade]

faire du poulet — to cook a chicken

5) ( nettoyer) to do, to clean [vitres]; to clean, to polish [chaussures]

6) Commerce ( proposer) to do [service, marque]; ( vendre) to do, to sell [article]

ils ne font pas le petit déjeuner — they don't do breakfast

l'hôtel fait-il restaurant? — does the hotel have a restaurant?

7) ( cultiver)

faire des céréales — [personne] to grow ou do cereals; [région] to produce cereals

8) ( se fournir en)

faire de l'eau — Nautisme, Chemin de Fer to take on water

faire (de) l'essence — (colloq) Automobile to get petrol GB ou gas US

9) ( parcourir) to do [distance, trajet]; to go round [magasins, agences]; ( visiter) to do (colloq) [région, musées]

faire toute la ville — to go all over town

faire l'Écosse — to visit Scotland

j'ai fait tous les tiroirs — I went through all the drawers

10) ( souffrir de) to have [diabète, tension, complexe]

faire une crise cardiaque — to have a heart attack

11) ( demander un prix)

faire quelque chose à 30 francs — to sell something for 30 francs, to charge 30 francs for something

12) ( servir de) to serve as

13) (user, disposer de) to do

qu'as-tu fait du billet? — what have you done with the ticket?

pour quoi faire? — what for?

je n'ai que faire de — I have no need for

je n'en ai rien à faire — (colloq) I couldn't care less

14) ( avoir un effet)

que veux-tu que j'y fasse? — what do you want me to do about it?, what am I supposed to do about it?

ça y fait — (colloq) it has an effect

leur départ ne m'a rien fait — their departure didn't affect me at all

ça me fait quelque chose de la voir dans cet état — it upsets me to see her in that state

pour ce que ça fait! — (colloq) for all the good it does!

ça ne fait rien à la chose — it makes no difference

qu'est-ce que ça peut bien te faire? — (colloq) what is it to you?

15) (entraîner, causer)

faire des jaloux — to make some people jealous

l'explosion a fait 12 morts — the explosion killed 12 people, the explosion left 12 people dead

ça ne fait rien! — ( pas grave) it doesn't matter!

ça fait ou ce qui fait que j'ai oublié — (colloq) as a result I forgot

16) ( transformer) to make

elle en a fait sa confidente — she's made her her confidante

faire d'un garage un atelier — to make ou turn a garage into a workshop

17) ( proclamer)

faire quelqu'un général — to make somebody a general

18) ( imiter)

faire le courageux — to pretend to be brave

faire le dictateur — to act the dictator

19) ( tenir le rôle de) to be

quel plaisantin vous faites! — what a joker you are!

20) ( dans un souhait)

mon Dieu, faites qu'il réussisse! — God, please let him succeed!

21) (colloq) ( tromper)

il me l'a fait au baratin — he talked me into it

on ne me la fait pas! — I'm not a fool!

22) ( dire) to say

‘bien sûr,’ fit-elle — ‘of course,’ she said

le canard fait ‘coin-coin’ — the duck says ou goes ‘quack’

2.

verbe intransitif

1) ( agir) to do, to act

fais comme tu veux — do as you like

faire vite — to act quickly

vas-y, mais fais vite! — go, but be quick about it!

fais comme chez toi — lit, iron make yourself at home

2) ( paraître) to look

faire jeune — to look young

3) (colloq) ( être) to be

il veut faire pompier — he wants to be a fireman

4) ( durer) to last

sa robe lui a fait deux ans — her dress lasted her two years

5) ( valoir)

ça fait cher — it is expensive

6) ( pour les besoins naturels) to go

tu as fait? — have you been?

7) (colloq)

faire avec — ( se contenter de) to make do with; ( supporter) to put up with

3.

se faire verbe pronominal

1)

se faire un café — to make oneself a coffee

se faire des amis — to make friends

se faire la cuisine soi-même — to do one's own cooking

combien se fait-il (colloq) par mois? — how much does he make a month?

2) ( devenir) to get, to become

il se fait tard — it's getting late

3) ( se rendre)

se faire tout petit — to make oneself very small

4) ( s'inquiéter)

s'en faire — to worry

il ne s'en fait pas! — ( sans inquiétude) he's not the sort of person to worry about things!; ( pas gêné) he's got a nerve!

5) ( s'habituer)

se faire à — to get used to [lieu, situation, idée]

6) ( être d'usage)

ça se fait encore ici — it's still done here

ça ne se fait pas — it's not the done thing ( de faire to do)

7) ( être à la mode) to be in (fashion)

ça ne se fait plus — it's no longer fashionable, it's out of fashion

8) ( être produit)

c'est ce qui se fait de mieux — it's the best there is

le pont se fera bien un jour — the bridge will be built one day

9) ( emploi impersonnel)

il se fit que — it (so) happened that

il se fit un grand silence — there was complete silence

comment se fait-il que...? — how is it that...?

10) [fromage] to ripen; [vin] to mature

11) (colloq)

il faut se le faire, son copain! — his/her mate is a real pain! (colloq)

12) ( avec infinitif)

se faire couler un bain — to run oneself a bath

se faire comprendre — to make oneself understood

••

Un très grand nombre de tournures et locutions contenant ce verbe sont traitées ailleurs, généralement sous le terme qui suit faire, en particulier

- les expressions décrivant les tâches domestiques, agricoles (faire la cuisine/moisson), les occupations manuelles (faire du tricot/bricolage), les activités professionnelles ou de loisir (faire du théâtre/de la photo), les types d'études ( faire médecine). Pour ce qui est des jeux, sports et loisirs, voir également la note d'usage correspondante

- les locutions décrivant un mouvement, l'expression, un comportement (faire un geste/une grimace/le pitre)

- les expressions dans lesquelles faire signifie ‘formuler’ (faire une promesse/offre etc)

- les expressions décrivant la qualité de la lumière (il fait jour/sombre) ou l'état du temps

- les expressions contenant une mesure (faire 20 mètres de long/15 kilos/20°/15 kilomètres à l'heure etc) pour lesquelles on consultera les notes d'usage

- les expressions décrivant une démarche de l'esprit (se faire une opinion/du souci etc)

- les expressions indiquant l'effet produit (faire peur/mal/plaisir/du tort etc, faire cuire/sécher/tomber etc)

- faire + venir/ entrer/ sortir etc

- les locutions telles que faire semblant/exprès, se faire avoir etc

- les expressions familières ( faire un enfant etc)

Par ailleurs pour les expressions décrivant

- une activité sportive (faire du tennis/de la marche/du parapente)

- une durée ( ça fait 15 ans)

la consultation des notes d'usage vous fournira des traductions utiles. Voir la liste

En outre, certaines entrées telles que combien, ce, que, comment, laisser, rien, mieux, bien etc fourniront également des traductions utiles

To make ou to do?

Les principales traductions de faire sont to make et to do mais elles ne sont pas interchangeables

to make traduit faire + objet dénotant ce qui est créé, confectionné, composé, réalisé, obtenu; l'objet est le résultat de l'action: faire son lit/des confitures = to make one's bed/jam; faire un discours/une faute/un bénéfice = to make a speech/a mistake/a profit; je me suis fait un café = I made myself a coffee

to do a le sens plus vague de se livrer à une activité, s'occuper à quelque chose; l'objet peut préciser la nature de l'activité: faire de la recherche/un exercice/une réparation = to do research/an exercise/a repair job; faire son devoir = to do one's duty

ou bien la nature de l'activité reste indéterminée: que fait-il (dans la vie)? = what does he do in life?; qu'est-ce que tu fais ce soir? = what are you doing tonight?; la science peut tout faire = science can do anything; j'ai à faire = I have things to do

ou encore le contexte suggère la nature de l'activité: faire une pièce = to do a room, peut vouloir dire la nettoyer, la ranger, la peindre

Si faire remplace un verbe plus précis, on traduira fréquemment par celui-ci: faire une maison/un nid = to build a house/a nest; faire une lettre = to write a letter; faire une visite = to pay a visit; faire un numéro de téléphone = to dial a number

Les périphrases verbales sont parfois rendues par un seul verbe: faire voir (= montrer) = to show; faire du tissage (= tisser) = to weave, mais faire un peu de tissage = to do a bit of weaving

Faire + infinitif + quelqu'un

faire + infinitive + quelqu'un, c'est-à-dire obtenir de quelqu'un qu'il agisse d'une certaine manière, se traduit selon le sens de faire, par: to make somebody do something (forcer, être cause que): fais-la lever = make her get up; ça m'a fait rire = it made me laugh; ça fait dormir = it makes you sleep; par to get somebody to do something (inciter): fais-leur prendre un rendez-vous = get them to make an appointment; par to help somebody to do something (aider): faire traverser la rue à un vieillard = to help an old man across the street; mais faire manger un bébé = to feed a child. Dans l'exemple ça fait dormir on notera qu'en anglais le sujet du verbe est toujours exprimé, ce qui n'est pas le cas en français

(se) faire faire quelque chose (par quelqu'un) se traduit par to have something done ou made (by somebody), ou, dans une langue plus familière, to get something done ou made (by somebody): (se) faire construire une maison = to have a house built; faire réparer sa voiture = to have ou get one's car repaired; c'est la table qu'il a fait faire = it's the table he had made; elle fait exécuter les travaux par un ami = she's having the work done by a friend

Ne faire que

exprime soit la continuité: il ne fait que pleuvoir = it never stops raining, it rains all the time

soit la restriction: je ne fais qu'obéir aux ordres = I'm only obeying orders

Faire reprend un autre verbe

Dans ce cas il sera généralement traduit par to do: ‘je peux regarder? ’ - ‘faites ou faites je vous en prie ’ = ‘may I look?’ - ‘please do’; il souffla, comme il avait vu faire son père = he blew, as he had seen his father do; on veut que je parte, mais je n'en ferai rien = they want me to leave, but I'll do nothing of the sort

Vous trouverez d'autres exemples dans l'entrée faire

* * *
fɛʀ
1. vt

1) (= fabriquer) to make

faire un film — to make a movie

faire du pain — to make bread

faire un gâteau — to make a cake

faire une offre — to make an offer

faire du bruit — to make a noise

Ils font trop de bruit. — They're making too much noise.

2) (= effectuer) to do

Que faites-vous? — What are you doing?

Que faites-vous dans la vie? — What do you do?

Que faire? — What can be done about it?

Qu'allons-nous faire? — What are we going to do?

faire la lessive — to do the washing

faire le ménage — to do the housework

faire la vaisselle — to do the dishes, to do the washing up

3) [études, sujet] to do

faire du droit — to do law

faire du français — to do French

Il fait de l'italien. — He's doing Italian.

4) (pratiquer régulièrement) [musique, rugby] to play

Il fait du piano. — He plays the piano.

faire du rugby — to play rugby

faire de la natation — to swim

faire de l'équitation — to ride

5) (se livrer ponctuellement à une activité)

faire du cheval — to go riding

faire du ski — to go skiing

6) (= visiter)

faire les magasins — to go shopping

faire l'Europe — to tour Europe, to do Europe

7) (= imiter)

faire le malade — to play the invalid

faire le mort — to play dead

faire l'ignorant — to play the fool

8) (= mesurer, totaliser) to be, to make

2 et 2 font 4. — 2 and 2 are 4., 2 and 2 make 4.

Ça fait 10 m. — It's 10 m.

Ça fait 15 euros. — It's 15 euros.

Ça fait cinquante-trois euros en tout. — That's fifty-three euros all together., That makes fifty-three euros all together.

Je vous le fais 10 euros. — I'll let you have it for 10 euros.

9) (= dire) to go

"Vraiment?" fit-il. — "Really?" he goes.

10) (= souffrir de) [diabète, eczéma] to have

faire du diabète — to have diabetes

faire de la tension — to have high blood pressure

11) (autres constructions)

faire qch à qn — to do sth to sb

Il regrettait ce qu'il avait fait à son frère. — He was sorry for what he had done to his brother.

ça ne fait rien — it doesn't matter

ça ne me fait rien — I don't mind

faire qch de qch — to do sth with sth

Qu'a-t-il fait de sa valise? — What has he done with his case?

faire de qn un avocat — to make sb a lawyer

faire que (= impliquer que) — to mean that

ce qui fait que... — which means that...

ne faire que (= ne pas arrêter de) Il ne fait que critiquer. — All he ever does is criticize.

2. vi

1) (= agir) to act

Il faut faire vite. — We must act quickly., It's important to act quickly.

je n'ai pas pu faire autrement — there was nothing else I could do

laissez-moi faire! — let me do it!

faites comme chez vous — make yourself at home

2) (= s'y prendre)

comment a-t-il fait pour...? — how did he manage to...?

3) (= paraître) (avec adjectif) to look

faire vieux — to look old

faire démodé — to look old-fashioned

Tu fais jeune dans cette robe. — That dress makes you look younger.

ça fait bien — it looks good

4) (remplaçant autre verbe) to do

Ne le casse pas comme je l'ai fait. — Don't break it like I did.

Je peux regarder? - Faites! — Can I have a look? - Please do!

Remets-le en place. - Je viens de le faire. — Put it back in its place.- I just did.

3. vb aux

(suivi d'un infinitif) to make

faire tomber qch — to make sth fall, to knock sth over

Le chat a fait tomber le vase. — The cat knocked over the vase.

faire bouger qch — to make sth move

faire démarrer un moteur — to start up an engine

faire chauffer de l'eau — to heat some water

cela fait dormir — it makes you sleep

faire travailler les enfants — to make the children work, to get the children to work

faire réparer qch — to get sth repaired, to have sth repaired

Je dois faire réparer ma voiture. — I've got to get my car repaired.

faire faire qch — to have sth done

Elle fait faire des travaux dans sa maison. — She's having some work done on her house.

Il a fait faire son portrait. — He's had his portrait done.

faire faire des économies à qn — to save sb money

Cela fait faire des économies au consommateur. — This saves the consumer money.

4. vb impers (temps)
to be
il fait beau — it's a lovely day

Espérons qu'il fera beau demain. — Let's hope it'll be nice weather tomorrow.

Qu'est-ce qu'il fait chaud! — Isn't it hot!

1) (durée)

ça fait 2 ans qu'il est parti — it's 2 years since he left

ça fait 2 ans qu'il y est — he's been there for 2 years

ça fait trois ans qu'ils habitent à Paris — they've lived in Paris for three years, they've been living in Paris for three years

2) (autres locutions)

il fait bon; Il fait bon se promener dans cette région. — It's nice to go walking in this area.

Il ne fait pas bon traîner ici le soir. — It's not a good idea to hang around here at night.

* * *

faire ⇒ Note d'usage verb table: faire

A vtr

1 (donner, émettre, produire) to make; le raisin fera un vin excellent the grapes will make ou produce (an) excellent wine; cet arbre fait des fleurs/baies this tree produces flowers/berries; le garage ferait une belle pièce the garage would make a nice room; ils font un beau couple they make a handsome couple; il fera un bon médecin he'll make a good doctor; les qualités qui font un champion the qualities which make a champion; trois et deux font cinq three and two make five; ça fait deux chacun that makes two each; combien font 13 fois 13? what's 13 times 13?; œil fait yeux au pluriel œil is yeux in the plural;

2 fig ( façonner) to shape [période]; les événements qui font l'histoire events which shape history;

3 ( étudier) to do [licence, diplôme]; on a fait la Chine en géographie we did China in geography; faire du violon to study ou play the violin; tu as fait ton piano? have you practised your piano?; faire une école de commerce/les Beaux-Arts to go to business school/art college;

4 ( préparer) to make [sauce, soupe, thé]; to prepare [salade]; faire du poulet to do ou cook a chicken; qu'est-ce que je fais pour le déjeuner? what shall I cook ou prepare for lunch?;

5 ( nettoyer) to do, to clean [vitres]; to clean, to polish [chaussures];

6 ( proposer) Comm to do [service, marque]; ( vendre) to do, to sell [article]; ils ne font pas le petit déjeuner/les réparations they don't do breakfast/repairs; je fais beaucoup ce modèle en ce moment I'm selling a lot of this particular model at the moment; l'hôtel fait-il restaurant? does the hotel do meals, does the hotel have a restaurant?;

7 (cultiver, produire) Agric faire des céréales [personne] to grow ou do cereals; [région] to produce cereals;

8 ( se fournir en) faire de l'eau Naut, Rail to take on water; faire (de) l'essence○ Aut to get petrol GB ou gas US; faire du bois dans la forêt to gather wood in the forest; faire de l'herbe pour les bêtes to cut grass for the animals;

9 ( parcourir) to do [distance, trajet]; to go round [magasins, agences]; ( visiter) to do○ [région, ville, musées]; faire 200 kilomètres to do 200 kilometres^GB; faire Rome-Nice en avion to do the Rome-Nice journey by plane; représentant qui fait○ la région parisienne rep○ who does the Paris area; j'ai dû faire toute la ville/toutes les boutiques pour trouver ça I had to go all over town/round GB ou around US all the shops to find this; faire la vallée de la Loire to do○ the Loire Valley; faire l'Écosse to visit Scotland; j'ai fait tous les tiroirs mais je ne l'ai pas trouvé I went through all the drawers but I couldn't find it;

10 ( dans le domaine de la santé) to have [diabète, tension, complexe]; faire une crise cardiaque to have a heart attack; faire de la fièvre○ to have ou run a temperature; faire de l'angine de poitrine to get angina; elle m'a encore fait une otite○! she's had another ear-infection!;

11 ( demander un prix) faire qch à 30 euros to sell sth for 30 euros, to charge 30 euros for sth; il me l'a fait à 500 euros he charged me ou sold it to me for 500 euros;

12 ( servir de) to serve as; ce coin fera bureau this corner will serve as a study;

13 (user, disposer de) to do; que vais-je faire des bagages/enfants? what am I going to do with the luggage/children?; qu'as-tu fait du billet? what have you done with the ticket?; pour ce qu'elle en fait! for all she does with it/them!; pour quoi faire? what for?; je n'ai que faire de I have no need for; je n'en ai rien à faire it's nothing to do with me;

14 ( avoir un effet) faire plus de mal que de bien to do more harm than good; qu'as-tu fait à ta sœur? what have you done to your sister?; que veux-tu que j'y fasse? what do you want me to do about it?, what am I supposed to do about it?; le cachet ne m'a rien fait the tablet didn't do anything, the tablet had no effect; ça y fait it has an effect; leur départ ne m'a rien fait their departure didn't affect me at all, their departure left me cold; ça me fait quelque chose de la voir dans cet état it upsets me to see her in that state; ça fait quelque chose pour la grippe? is it any good for flu?; pour ce que ça fait! for all the good it does!; ça ne vous fait rien que je fume? do you mind ou does it bother you if I smoke?; ça ne fait rien à la chose it doesn't alter ou change anything, it makes no difference; qu'est-ce que ça peut bien te faire? what is it to you?;

15 (entraîner, causer) faire des jaloux to make some people jealous; ça a fait leur fortune it made them rich; l'explosion a fait 12 morts the explosion killed 12 people, the explosion left 12 people dead; ne t'inquiète pas, ça ne fait rien! don't worry, it doesn't matter!; ça fait ou ce qui fait que j'ai oublié○ as a result I forgot; ‘qu'est-ce que j'ai fait?’-‘tu as fait que tu as menti○’ ‘what have I done?’-‘you lied, that's what you've done’; faites que tout se passe bien make sure that all goes well;

16 ( transformer) to make; l'armée en a fait un homme the army made a man of him; ils veulent en faire un avocat they want to make a lawyer of him; elle en a fait sa confidente she's made her her confidante; ça a fait de lui un révolté it turned him into a rebel, it made him a rebel; j'en ai fait un principe I made it a principle; faire d'un garage un atelier to make ou turn a garage into a workshop; faire sien qch to make sth one's own;

17 ( proclamer) faire qn duc/général to make sb a duke/general; la presse l'a fait diplomate ( à tort) the press made him out to be a diplomat; ne le fais pas pire qu'il n'est! don't make him out to be worse than he is!, don't paint him blacker than he is!;

18 ( imiter) faire le malade/le courageux to pretend to be ill/brave; faire l'ignorant or celui qui ne sait rien to pretend not to know; faire le dictateur to act the dictator;

19 ( tenir le rôle de) to be; quel plaisantin vous faites! what a joker you are!; vous ferez les voleurs! Jeux you be the robbers!; l'acteur qui fait le roi○ Cin, Théât the actor who plays the part of the king, the actor who is the king;

20 ( dans un souhait) mon Dieu, faites qu'il réussisse! God, please let him succeed!; Dieu or le ciel fasse qu'il ne leur arrive rien! may God ou Heaven protect them!;

21 ○( tromper) il me l'a fait au baratin/chantage he talked/blackmailed me into it; on ne me la fait pas! I'm not a fool!, I wasn't born yesterday!

B vi

1 (agir, procéder) to do, to act; je n'ai pas pu faire autrement I couldn't do otherwise; fais comme tu veux do as you like; elle peut faire mieux she can do better; dans ces situations, il faut faire vite in that sort of situation, one must act quickly; vas-y, mais fais vite! go, but be quick about it!; fais comme chez toi lit, iron make yourself at home;

2 ( paraître) to look; faire jeune/son âge to look young/one's age; ça fait bien avec du bleu it looks nice with blue; tes lunettes font très distingué your glasses make you look very distinguished; il croit que ça fait chic de dire ça he thinks it's chic to say that;

3 ( être) to be; il veut faire pompier he wants to be a fireman;

4 ( dire) to say; ‘bien sûr,’ fit-elle ‘of course,’ she said; le canard fait ‘coin-coin’ the duck says ou goes ‘quack’; faire plouf/aïe etc to go plop/ouch etc;

5 ( durer) to last; sa robe lui a fait deux ans her dress lasted her two years;

6 (+ adverbe de quantité) ça fait cher/grand/trop etc it is expensive/big/too much etc;

7 ( pour les besoins naturels) to go; tu as fait? have you been?; faire dans sa culotte ( déféquer) to dirty one's pants; ( uriner) to wet one's pants; fig to wet oneself;

8 ○ faire avec ( se contenter de) to make do with [personne, objet, quantité]; ( supporter) to put up with [personne, situation]; elle est là, et il faudra faire avec she's here, and we'll have to put up with her.

C se faire vpr

1 (confectionner, exécuter, obtenir pour soi) se faire un café to make oneself a coffee; se faire de l'argent/des amis to make money/friends; se faire ses vêtements to make one's own clothes; se faire la cuisine soi-même to do one's own cooking; combien se fait-il par mois? how much does he make a month? ; se faire un mec◑ to have◑ a man;

2 ( devenir) (+ adjectif attribut) to get, to become; (+ nom attribut) to become; il se fait vieux he's getting old; il se fait tard it's getting late; sa voix se fit dure his/her voice hardened ou became hard; se faire avocat to become a lawyer;

3 ( se rendre) se faire belle/tout petit to make oneself beautiful/very small;

4 ( s'inquiéter) s'en faire to worry; il ne s'en fait pas! ( sans inquiétude) he's not the sort of person to worry about things!; ( pas gêné) he's got a nerve!;

5 ( s'habituer) se faire à to get used to [lieu, situation, idée]; je ne m'y fais pas I can't get used to it;

6 ( être d'usage) ça se fait encore ici it's still done here; ça ne se fait pas de manger avec les doigts it's not the done thing ou it's not polite to eat with one's fingers;

7 ( être à la mode) [couleur, style] to be in (fashion); le tweed se fait beaucoup cette année tweed is very much in this year; ça ne se fait plus it's no longer fashionable, it's out of fashion;

8 ( être produit ou accompli) c'est ce qui se fait de mieux it's the best there is; le mariage s'est fait à Paris the wedding took place in Paris; le pont se fera bien un jour the bridge will be built one day; souhaitons que la paix se fasse let's hope there'll be peace;

9 ( emploi impersonnel) il se fit que it (so) happened that; il se fit un grand silence there was complete silence; il s'est fait un déclic dans mon esprit something clicked in my mind; il pourrait se faire que je parte I might leave; comment se fait-il que…? how is it that…?;

10 ( mûrir) [fromage] to ripen; [vin] to mature;

11 ○( supporter) to put up with, to endure [importun]; il faut se le faire, son copain! his/her mate is a real pain○!;

12 ( avec infinitif) se faire couler un bain to run oneself a bath; se faire comprendre to make oneself understood; se faire agresser to get mugged; tu vas te faire écraser! you'll get run over!

[fɛr] verbe transitif

A.[FABRIQUER, RÉALISER]

1. [confectionner - objet, vêtement] to make ; [ - construction] to build ; [ - tableau] to paint ; [ - film] to make ; [ - repas, café] to make, to prepare ; [ - gâteau, pain] to make, to bake ; [ - vin] to make ; [ - bière] to brew

[concevoir - thèse, dissertation] to do

qu'as-tu fait (à manger) pour ce soir ? what have you prepared for dinner ?

c'est elle qui fait ses chansons she writes her own songs

il sait tout faire he can turn his hand to anything

grand-mère est super — oui, on n'en fait plus des comme ça! (familier) grandma's great — yes, they broke the mould when they made her!

2. [produire, vendre]

faire de l'élevage de bétail to breed cattle

faire du blé/de la vigne to grow wheat/grapes

faire une marque/un produit to stock a make/an article

je vous fais les deux à 350 euros (familier) you can have both for 350 euros, I'll take 350 euros for both

3. [obtenir, gagner - bénéfices] to make

faire de l'argent to earn ou to make money

4. [mettre au monde]

faire un enfant to have a child

il lui a fait deux enfants he had two children with her

la chatte a fait des petits the cat has had kittens

5. PHYSIOLOGIE

faire ses besoins (euphémisme) to do one's business

(en usage absolu)

tu as fait ce matin ? did you go to the toilet this morning ?

il a fait dans sa culotte (familier) he messed his pants

B.[ACCOMPLIR, EXÉCUTER]

1. [effectuer - mouvement, signe] to make

[saut périlleux, roue] to do

fais-moi un bisou (familier) /un sourire give me a kiss/a smile

faire la tête ou la gueule (très familier) to sulk

2. [accomplir - choix, erreur, réforme, proposition] to make ; [ - inventaire] to do ; [ - discours] to deliver, to make, to give ; [ - conférence] to give ; [ - exercice] to do ; [ - recherches] to do, to carry out (separable) ; [ - enquête] to carry out (separable)

faire ses études to study

faire son devoir to do one's duty

faire une blague à quelqu'un to play a joke on somebody

faire son lit to make one's bed

la faire à quelqu'un (familier) [plaisanterie]: on ne me la fait pas, à moi! I won't be taken in!

on me l'a déjà faite, celle-là I know that one already

3. [étudier - matière, œuvre] to study, to do

[suivre les cours de]

elle voulait faire l'ENA she wanted to go to the ENA

4. [pratiquer]

faire de la poterie to do pottery

faire de la flûte/du violon to play the flute/the violin

faire de la danse [cours] to go to dance classes

il voulait faire de la danse he wanted to be a dancer

faire de l'équitation/de la natation/de la voile to go horseriding/swimming/sailing

faire du basket/du tennis to play basketball/tennis

5. [écrire - lettre] to write ; [ - contrat, testament] to write, to make

6. [dire] to say

il fit oui/non de la tête he nodded/he shook his head

"non", fit-elle "no", she said

la vache fait "meuh!" the cow goes "moo!"

7. [nettoyer - chambre, vitres] to clean, to do ; [ - chaussures] to polish, to clean

[tapisser, aménager - pièce, maison] to do, to decorate

8. [action non précisée] to do

que fais-tu dans la vie ? what do you do (for a living) ?

je ne t'ai jamais rien fait! I've never done you any harm!

ne faire que: elle ne fait que se plaindre she does nothing but complain

je ne veux rien avoir à faire avec eux! I don't want anything to do with them!

faire quelque chose de quelqu'un/quelque chose: qu'ai-je fait de mes clefs ? what have I done with ou where did I put my keys ?

que fais-tu de mes sentiments dans tout ça ? what about my feelings ?

que vais-je faire de toi ? what am I going to do with you ?

donne-le moi! — non, rien à faire! give it to me! — nothing doing ou no way!

tu lui as parlé ? — oui, mais rien à faire, il ne cédera pas did you talk to him ? — yes, but it's no use, he won't give in

je vais vous raccompagner — n'en faites rien! (soutenu) I'll take you back — there's really no need!

faire avec (familier) to make do

j'apprécie peu sa façon de travailler mais il faut bien faire avec! I don't like the way he works but I suppose I'll just have to put up with it!

faire sans (familier) to (make) do without

autant que faire se peut if possible, as far as possible

n'avoir que faire de: je n'ai que faire de tes conseils I don't need your advice

mais bien sûr, tu n'as que faire de ma carrière! but of course, my career matters very little to you! ou you don't care about my career!

pour ce faire for that

ce faisant in so doing

C.[AVEC IDÉE DE DÉPLACEMENT]

1. [se déplacer à la vitesse de]

le train peut faire jusqu'à 400 km/h the train can do 400 km/h

2. [couvrir - distance]

le Concorde fait Paris-New York en moins de quatre heures Concorde goes ou flies from Paris to New York in less than fours hours

il y a des cars qui font Londres-Glasgow there's a coach service between London and Glasgow

3. [visiter - pays, ville] to do, to go to, to visit

[inspecter, passer au crible]

j'ai fait tous les étages avant de vous trouver I looked on every floor before I found you

j'ai fait tous les hôtels de la ville

a. [j'y suis allé] I did ou went to ou tried every hotel in town

b. [j'ai téléphoné] I called ou did ou tried every hotel in town

faire les antiquaires to go round the antique shops

D.[AVEC IDÉE DE TRANSFORMATION]

1. [nommer]

elle l'a fait baron she gave him the title of Baron, she made him a baron

elle l'a fait chevalier she knighted him

2. [transformer en]

faire quelque chose de quelqu'un/quelque chose: des rats, la fée fit des laquais the fairy changed the rats into footmen

ce feuilleton en a fait une vedette this series made him a star

et ta robe bleue ? — j'en ai fait une jupe what about your blue dress ? — I made it into a skirt

garde les restes, j'en ferai une soupe keep the leftovers, I'll make a soup with them

c'était un tyran et votre livre en fait un héros! he was a tyrant, and your book shows ou presents him as a hero!

3. [devenir]

"cheval" fait "chevaux" au pluriel the plural of "cheval" is "chevaux"

4. [servir de]

une fois plié, le billard fait table the billiard table, when folded, can be used ou can serve as a normal table

un canapé qui fait lit a convertible settee

c'est un hôtel qui fait restaurant it's a hotel with a restaurant

5. [remplir un rôle, une fonction]

il fera un bon mari he'll make ou be a good husband

il fait le Père Noël dans les rues he goes around the streets disguised as Father Christmas

CINÉMA & THÉÂTRE to play the part of, to be

[imiter - personne] to imitate, to take off, to impersonate ; [ - automate, animal] to imitate

ne fais pas l'idiot don't be stupid

ne fais pas l'innocent don't play the innocent, don't come the innocent with me (UK)

il essayait de faire son intéressant he was showing off

E.[INDIQUE UN RÉSULTAT]

1. [provoquer]

faire de la poussière to raise dust

ce charbon fait beaucoup de fumée this coal makes a lot of smoke

ça va faire une marque/une auréole it will leave a mark/a ring

l'accident a fait cinq morts the accident left five dead ou claimed five lives

ce qui fait l'intérêt de son livre what makes his book interesting

faire quelque chose à quelqu'un [l'émouvoir] to move somebody, to affect somebody

la vue du sang ne me fait rien I don't mind the sight of blood, the sight of blood doesn't bother me

si cela ne vous fait rien if you don't mind

faire que: la gravitation, force qui fait que les objets s'attirent gravitation, the force which causes objects to be attracted towards each other

ce qui fait que je suis arrivé en retard which meant I was late

[pour exprimer un souhait]

faites qu'il ne lui arrive rien! please don't let anything happen to him!

2. [importer]

qu'est-ce que cela peut faire? what does it matter ?, so what?

qu'est-ce que cela peut te faire? what's it to (do with) you ?

cela ne fait rien it doesn't matter, never mind

F.[INDIQUE UNE QUALITÉ, UNE FORME, UNE MESURE]

1. [former]

la route fait un coude the road bends

le circuit fait un huit the circuit is (in the shape of) a figure of eight

le tas fait une pyramide the heap looks like a pyramid

2. [coûter] to be, to cost

ça fait combien ? how much is it ?

3. [valoir, égaler] to be, to make

2 et 2 font 4 2 and 2 are 4

ça fait 23 en tout that makes 23 altogether

on a dix euros, ça ne fait pas assez we've got ten euros, that's not enough

4. [mesurer]

il doit bien faire 1 m 90 he must be 1 m 90 tall

[taille, pointure]

je fais du 38 I take size 38

[peser]

je fais 56 kg I weigh ou am 56 kg

5. [indique la durée, le temps]

ça fait deux jours qu'il n'a pas mangé he hasn't eaten for two days

elle a téléphoné, cela fait bien une heure she phoned at least an hour ago

G.[VERBE ATTRIBUTIF]

1. [paraître]

la broche fait bien ou joli ou jolie sur ta robe the brooch looks nice on your dress

elle parle avec un léger accent, il paraît que ça fait bien! she talks with a slight accent, it's supposed to be smart!

ça fait bizarre it looks strange

il me faudrait un nom qui fasse artiste I would need a name which sounds good for an artist

ça fait comment ou quoi de voir son nom sur une affiche? what's it like to see your name on a poster ?

faire son âge to look one's age

2. (familier) [devenir, embrasser la carrière de] to be

je veux faire pompier I want to be a fireman

H.[VERBE DE SUBSTITUTION] (toujours en rappel du verbe utilisé)

range ta chambre — je l'ai déjà fait go and tidy up your room — I've already done it

vous le lui expliquerez mieux que je ne saurais le faire you'll explain it to her better than I could

tu lui écriras ? — oui, je le ferai will you write to him ? — yes I will

puis-je prendre cette chaise ? — (mais) faites donc! (soutenu) may I take this chair ? — please do ou by all means!

————————

[fɛr] verbe intransitif

[agir] to do

fais comme chez toi [à l'arrivée de quelqu'un] make yourself at home

fais comme chez toi, surtout! (ironique) you've got a nerve!, don't mind me! (ironique)

faites comme vous voulez do as you please

fais comme tu veux! [ton irrité] suit yourself!

je le lui ai rendu — tu as bien fait! I gave it back to him — you did the right thing ou you did right!

pourquoi l'as-tu acheté ? — je croyais bien faire! why did you buy it ? — I thought it was a good idea!

tu ferais bien d'y réfléchir you'd do well to ou you should ou you'd better think about it!

pour bien faire, il faudrait réserver aujourd'hui the best thing would be to book today, ideally we should book today

ça commence à bien faire! enough is enough!

————————

[fɛr] verbe impersonnel

1. MÉTÉOROLOGIE

il fait chaud/froid it's hot/cold

il faisait nuit it was dark

il fait (du) soleil the sun is shining

2. (locution)

c'en est fait de (soutenu) : c'en est fait de vous you've had it, you're done for

c'est bien fait pour toi it serves you right

————————

[fɛr] verbe auxiliaire

1. [provoquer une réaction]

tu l'as fait rougir you made her blush

ça me fait dormir it puts ou sends me to sleep

2. [forcer à] to make, to have

fais-moi penser à le lui demander remind me to ask him

faites-le attendre

a. [pour qu'il s'impatiente] let him wait

b. [en lui demandant] ask him to wait

n'essaie pas de me faire croire que... don't try to make ou to have me believe that...

ne me fais pas dire ce que je n'ai pas dit don't put words into my mouth

il me faisait faire ses dissertations he had me write his essays for him

3. [commander de]

fairefaire quelque chose par quelqu'un to have somebody do ou make something, to have something done ou made by somebody

il fait faire ses costumes sur mesure he has his suits tailormade

————————

faire dans verbe plus préposition

(familier)

il ne fait pas dans le détail he doesn't bother about details

son entreprise fait maintenant dans les produits de luxe her company now produces luxury items

————————

se faire verbe pronominal (emploi réfléchi)

1. [réussir]

elle s'est faite seule she's a self-made woman

2. [se forcer à]

se faire pleurer/vomir to make oneselfcry/vomit

————————

se faire verbe pronominal (emploi réciproque)

se faire la guerre to wage war on each other

————————

se faire verbe pronominal (emploi passif)

1. [être à la mode] to be fashionable, to be in fashion

les salopettes ne se font plus dungarees are out of fashion

2. [être convenable]

ça ne se fait pas de demander son âge à une femme it's rude ou it's not done to ask a woman her age

3. [être réalisé]

sans argent le film ne se fera pas without money the film will never be made

les choses se font petit à petit things evolve gradually

je dois signer un nouveau contrat, mais je ne sais pas quand cela va se faire I'm going to sign a new contract, but I don't know when that will be

tu pourrais me prêter 1 500 euros ? — ça pourrait se faire could you lend me 1,500 euros ? — that should be possible

(tournure impersonnelle)

comment se fait-il que... ? how come ou how is it that... ?

il pourrait se faire que... it might ou may be that..., it's possible that...

c'est ce qui se fait de mieux en papiers peints lavables it's the best washable wallpaper available

————————

se faire verbe pronominal intransitif

1. [se former]

les couples se font et se défont people get together and separate

2. (suivi d'un infinitif)

se faire opérer to have an operation

se faire tuer to get killed

se faire couper les cheveux to have one's hair cut

3. [devenir] to become

sa voix se fit plus grave his voice became deeper

s'il arrive à l'heure, je veux bien me faire nonne! (familier) if he arrives on time, I'll eat my hat!

(tournure impersonnelle)

il se fait tard it's getting late

4. [s'améliorer - fromage] to ripen ; [ - vin] to mature

mes chaussures me serrent — elles vont se faire my shoes feel tight — they'll stretch

————————

se faire verbe pronominal transitif

1. [fabriquer]

elle se fait ses vêtements she makes her own clothes

2. [effectuer sur soi]

il se fait ses piqûres seul he gives himself his own injections

je me suis fait une natte I've plaited my hair

[se maquiller]

se faire les ongles to do one's nails

se faire les yeux to make up one's eyes

3. (familier) [gagner]

elle se fait 4000 euros par mois she earns 4,000 euros per month, she gets 4,000 euros every month

4. (familier) [s'accorder]

on se fait un film/un petit café ? what about going to see a film/going for a coffee ?

on s'est fait les trois musées dans la journée we did the three museums in one day

5. (familier) [supporter]

il faut se la faire! she's a real pain!

6. (très familier & argot milieu) [tuer] to kill, to bump off

[agresser] to beat up

7. (vulgaire) [posséder sexuellement] to screw (vulgaire), to lay (vulgaire)

————————

se faire à verbe pronominal plus préposition

to get used to

————————

s'en faire verbe pronominal intransitif

to worry

je ne m'en fais pas pour lui I'm not worried about him

elle s'en souviendra, ne t'en fais pas! she'll remember, don't you worry!

encore au lit ? tu ne t'en fais pas! still in bed ? you're taking it easy, aren't you ?

tu as ouvert mon courrier ? faut pas t'en faire! (familier) you've opened my mail ? you've got some nerve ou don't mind me!

Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > faire

88 ἀναφέρω

ἀναφέρω fut. ἀνοίσω LXX (also Just., D. 112 al.), 2 aor. ἀνήνεγκα (late form) and ἀνήνεγκον (B-D-F §80; 81; W-S. §13, 13; Mlt-H. 263); pf. ἀνενήνοχα LXX. Pass.: fut. ἀνενεχθήσομαι LXX; aor. ἀνηνέχθην (s. φέρω; Hom.+ in var. mngs.; ins, pap, LXX; TestSol 10:9 L; TestAbr, TestJob, Test12Patr; JosAs 10:4; ParJer; GrBar 8:4; ApcSed [-φέρυσται 10:3;-φέρνεται p. 133, 36 Ja.]; ApcMos 32; ApcZeph; Philo, Aet. M. 64; Jos., Bell. 1, 234, C. Ap. 1, 232)

① to cause to move from a lower position to a higher, take, lead, bring up, of pers. ἀ. αὐτοὺς εἰς ὄρος ὑψηλόν he led them up a high mountain Mt 17:1; Mk 9:2. Pass. ἀνεφέρετο εἰς τ. οὐρανόν he was taken up into heaven (of Romulus: Plut., Numa 60 [2, 4]; of Endymion: Hes., Fgm. 148 Rz. τὸν Ἐνδυμίωνα ἀνενεχθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ Διὸς εἰς οὐρανόν; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57 and 58 p. 264, 17) Lk 24:51 (MParsons, The Departure of Jesus in Luke-Acts ’87). ἀναφερόμενοι εἰς τὰ ὕψη IEph 9:1.

② to carry and hand over someth. to someone, deliver ἀνήνεγκεν τῷ ἱερεῖ (Mary) delivered to the priest her purple and scarlet embroidery work GJs 12:1 (pap; mss. v.l. ἀπ-). Of food, Syn. w. αἴρω GJs 18:2 (s. αἴρω 2b).

③ to offer as a sacrifice, offer up, specif. a cultic t.t. (SIG 56, 68; Lev 17:5; 1 Esdr 5:49; Is 57:6; 2 Macc 1:18; 2:9 al.; ParJer 9:1f; Did., Gen. 219, 15) ἀ. θυσίας ὑπέρ τινος offer sacrifices for someth. Hb 7:27. ἀ. τινὰ ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον (Gen 8:20; Lev 14:20; Bar 1:10; 1 Macc 4:53; Just., D. 118, 2 θυσίας) offer up someone on the altar Js 2:21. Of Jesus’ sacrifice: ἑαυτὸν ἀνενέγκας when he offered up himself Hb 7:27. τὰς ἀμαρτίας ἡμῶν αὐτὸς ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον he himself brought our sins in his body to the cross 1 Pt 2:24 (cp. Dssm., B 83ff [BS 88f]). Pol 8:1 (Is 53:12).—Fig. (schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 2, 214b χάριν=render thanks to the divinity) ἀ. θυσίαν αἰνέσεως offer up a sacr. of praise Hb 13:15 (cp. 2 Ch 29:31). ἀ. πνευματικὰς θυσίας 1 Pt 2:5. ἀ. προσευχάς offer prayers 2 Cl 2:2. ἀ. δέησιν περί τινος offer up a petition for someth. B 12:7.

④ take up as a burden, take up. In Is 53:11 ἀ. is used to translate סָבַל, in vs. 12 for נָשָׂא, and in the corresponding passages in our lit. ἀ. is often rendered ‘bear’ or ‘take away’. But ἀ. seems not to have these meanings. Very often, on the contrary, it has a sense that gives ἀνα its full force: lay or impose a burden on someone, give something to someone to bear, as a rule, in fact, to someone who is not obligated to bear it (Aeschyl., Choeph. 841 ἄχθος; Polyb. 1, 36, 3; 4, 45, 9; Diod S 15, 48, 4; 32, 26, 1; Appian, Liby. 93; Syr. 41, where the other defendants were τὴν αἰτίαν ἐς τὸν Ἐπαμεινώνδαν ἀναφέροντες, i.e. putting the blame on Epaminondas. The Lex. Vind. p. 12, 3 sees in Eur., Or. 76 ἐς Φοῖβον ἀναφέρουσα τ. ἁμαρτίαν and in Procop. Soph., Ep. 7 p. 535 H. proof that ἀναφέρειν is used ἀντὶ τοῦ τὴν αἰτίαν εἰς ἕτερον τιθέναι.) In a case in which a man takes upon himself the burden that another should have borne, then ἀ.= take upon oneself (Thu. 3, 38, 3 ἡ πόλις τὰ μὲν ἆθλα ἑτέροις δίδωσιν, αὐτὴ δὲ τοὺς κινδύνους ἀναφέρει=the city gives the prizes to others, but she takes the dangers upon herself). Christ was once for all offered up in this respect (εἰς 5) that he assumed the sins of many Hb 9:28. Cp. 1 Cl 16:12, 14.—M-M. TW. Spicq.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀναφέρω

89 עול

עוּל(interch. with עֲלַל) 1) to come, come in. Perf. עָל, עָאל; part. עָל, עָאֵיל, עָאֵל, עָיֵיל. Targ. O. Ex. 7:23 על; Targ. Y. עאל (ed. Amst. אָעַל). Targ. Y. ib. 33:9 עאיל (ed. Amst. אָעֵיל). Targ. O. Gen. 23:10 עָאלֵי (ed. Berl. a. oth. עָלֵי; Y. עֲלֵי). Targ. Prov. 17:10 עָאלָא ed. Lag. (oth. ed. עָלָא); a. fr.Y.Kidd.II, 63a top דחק סומכוס ועאל S. pressed on and went in. Yoma 51b נֵיעוּלוכ׳ (Ms. M. נעביד) let him make his entrance in the way prescribed by R. J. Ib. 52a ניעול בין מנורהוכ׳ let him make his entrance between the candlestick and the wall. Pes.112a; B. Bath.21a שבשתא כיון דעל על a mistake once entered (into the mind) remains therein. Sabb.98b האי עָיֵיל והאי נפיק one will go in (recede), the other go out (protrude, i. e. form an uneven surface.); a. v. fr. 2) to bring in. Targ. Y. Gen. 6:19 תֵעוֹל ed. Vien. (v. עֲלַל).Gen. R. s. 67 (ref. to ועל חרבך Gen. 27:40) עול חרבךוכ׳ bring thy sword home (into its sheath), and thou shalt live; (Yalk. ib. 115 תטול, read: תֵּעוּל). Pa. עַיֵּיל 1) to come in habitually. Inf. מְעַיֵּיל, v. מֵעֲלָא. 2) to bring in, insert. Ḥull.42b אפיק … ועַיֵּיל, v. נֽפַק. Erub.44b בעי עַיְּילִינְהוּ wanted to bring them in. Sabb.96b מה לי אפוקי ומה לי עַיּיוּלֵי what is the difference between carrying out and bringing in? Erub.38b ע׳ רב חסדאוכ׳ R. Ḥ. brought (the subject) in, in order to show a contradiction Keth.61a, עַיְּילִיתוכ׳, v. חֲרִיקָא. Ib. 101a עַיְּילָא ליה גלימא if she brought him a cloak (as dowry). Yoma 47a נְעַיֵּיל והדר נעייל shall he bring in (one portion) and again bring in (another portion)?; a. fr. 3) to produce, develop, ripen. R. Hash. 13a ודילמא לא ע׳ כלל perhaps it means when it (the growing vegetation) had not yet begun to ripen at all? Ib. דע׳ ביד נכרי the barley of which the ‘Omer was brought had ripened while in the possession of a gentile (a Canaanite). Ib. דע׳ ריבעא if it has developped one fourth of the full size; a. e. Ithpa. אִתְעַיֵּיל to insert ones self; to get in. Yoma 51b ולא מִתְעַיֵּיל ליה he could not get himself in (between the table and the wall). Af. אָעֵיל; Ittaf. אִיתָּעַל, Ithpe. אִתְעַל, v. עֲלַל.

Jewish literature > עול

90 עוּל

עוּל(interch. with עֲלַל) 1) to come, come in. Perf. עָל, עָאל; part. עָל, עָאֵיל, עָאֵל, עָיֵיל. Targ. O. Ex. 7:23 על; Targ. Y. עאל (ed. Amst. אָעַל). Targ. Y. ib. 33:9 עאיל (ed. Amst. אָעֵיל). Targ. O. Gen. 23:10 עָאלֵי (ed. Berl. a. oth. עָלֵי; Y. עֲלֵי). Targ. Prov. 17:10 עָאלָא ed. Lag. (oth. ed. עָלָא); a. fr.Y.Kidd.II, 63a top דחק סומכוס ועאל S. pressed on and went in. Yoma 51b נֵיעוּלוכ׳ (Ms. M. נעביד) let him make his entrance in the way prescribed by R. J. Ib. 52a ניעול בין מנורהוכ׳ let him make his entrance between the candlestick and the wall. Pes.112a; B. Bath.21a שבשתא כיון דעל על a mistake once entered (into the mind) remains therein. Sabb.98b האי עָיֵיל והאי נפיק one will go in (recede), the other go out (protrude, i. e. form an uneven surface.); a. v. fr. 2) to bring in. Targ. Y. Gen. 6:19 תֵעוֹל ed. Vien. (v. עֲלַל).Gen. R. s. 67 (ref. to ועל חרבך Gen. 27:40) עול חרבךוכ׳ bring thy sword home (into its sheath), and thou shalt live; (Yalk. ib. 115 תטול, read: תֵּעוּל). Pa. עַיֵּיל 1) to come in habitually. Inf. מְעַיֵּיל, v. מֵעֲלָא. 2) to bring in, insert. Ḥull.42b אפיק … ועַיֵּיל, v. נֽפַק. Erub.44b בעי עַיְּילִינְהוּ wanted to bring them in. Sabb.96b מה לי אפוקי ומה לי עַיּיוּלֵי what is the difference between carrying out and bringing in? Erub.38b ע׳ רב חסדאוכ׳ R. Ḥ. brought (the subject) in, in order to show a contradiction Keth.61a, עַיְּילִיתוכ׳, v. חֲרִיקָא. Ib. 101a עַיְּילָא ליה גלימא if she brought him a cloak (as dowry). Yoma 47a נְעַיֵּיל והדר נעייל shall he bring in (one portion) and again bring in (another portion)?; a. fr. 3) to produce, develop, ripen. R. Hash. 13a ודילמא לא ע׳ כלל perhaps it means when it (the growing vegetation) had not yet begun to ripen at all? Ib. דע׳ ביד נכרי the barley of which the ‘Omer was brought had ripened while in the possession of a gentile (a Canaanite). Ib. דע׳ ריבעא if it has developped one fourth of the full size; a. e. Ithpa. אִתְעַיֵּיל to insert ones self; to get in. Yoma 51b ולא מִתְעַיֵּיל ליה he could not get himself in (between the table and the wall). Af. אָעֵיל; Ittaf. אִיתָּעַל, Ithpe. אִתְעַל, v. עֲלַל.

Jewish literature > עוּל

91 קרוב I

קָרוֹבI m. (b. h.; קָרֵב) near; related, relative. Y.Ber.IX, 13a top (ref. to Deut. 4:7) ק׳ בכל מיני קריבות (God is) near in every way of nearness (at all times, in all places, in sympathy). Snh.9a נמצא … ק׳וכ׳ if it appears that one of the witnesses is a near relative (of the defendant) or disqualified. Ib. b אדם ק׳ אצל עצמו ואיןוכ׳ every man is considered a relation to himself, and none can incriminate himself. Ib. 10a אדם ק׳ … ואינו ק׳ אצל ממונו a man cannot testify against himself, but he is not a relative to (disqualified to testify against) his property. Ib. III, 4 היה ק׳ ונתרחק if a person was a relation (by marriage, so as to be disqualified), and became a stranger again. B. Mets.39a שבוי … מורידין ק׳וכ׳ if a person has been carried off captive, they (the court) appoint a relative to manage his estate. Ib. ק׳ מחמת ק׳ an indirect relative (e. g. ones step-brothers step-brother); a. v. fr.Pl. קְרוֹבִים, קְרוֹבִין. Gitt.14b ק׳ למלכות connected with royalty, influential. Snh.III, 4 ואלו הן הק׳ the following are considered relatives (disqualified to act as judges or witnesses); a. fr.Sabb.152a ק׳ נעשו רחוקים near objects have become distant (my senses are dull from old age).Tanḥ. Bshall. 18 ועברה קרובים; Y.Taan.II, 66a top שהגיע לקרובין, v. קָרוּכִין.Fem. קְרוֹבָה. Y. Ber. l. c. ע״ז נראית ק׳ ואינהוכ׳ the idol is apparently near, but in fact distant. Esth. R. to III, 1 Haman reflected in his heart אם אסתר … קְרוֹבָתִי if Esther is a Jewess, she is my relative. Meg.14b חולדה קְרוֹבַתוכ׳ Huldah was a relative of Jeremiahs; a. fr.Pl. קְרוֹבוֹת. Gen. R. s. 18 נשא … מקְרוֹבוֹתָיווכ׳ if a man marries one of his relatives, of him it is said ‘bone of my bones (Gen. 2:23). Lev. R. s. 18 רחוקות נעשי ק׳ ק׳וכ׳ distant objects have become near (things that I could discern at a distance must be brought near me), near objects have become distant, v. supra; a. fr.

Jewish literature > קרוב I

92 קָרוֹב

קָרוֹבI m. (b. h.; קָרֵב) near; related, relative. Y.Ber.IX, 13a top (ref. to Deut. 4:7) ק׳ בכל מיני קריבות (God is) near in every way of nearness (at all times, in all places, in sympathy). Snh.9a נמצא … ק׳וכ׳ if it appears that one of the witnesses is a near relative (of the defendant) or disqualified. Ib. b אדם ק׳ אצל עצמו ואיןוכ׳ every man is considered a relation to himself, and none can incriminate himself. Ib. 10a אדם ק׳ … ואינו ק׳ אצל ממונו a man cannot testify against himself, but he is not a relative to (disqualified to testify against) his property. Ib. III, 4 היה ק׳ ונתרחק if a person was a relation (by marriage, so as to be disqualified), and became a stranger again. B. Mets.39a שבוי … מורידין ק׳וכ׳ if a person has been carried off captive, they (the court) appoint a relative to manage his estate. Ib. ק׳ מחמת ק׳ an indirect relative (e. g. ones step-brothers step-brother); a. v. fr.Pl. קְרוֹבִים, קְרוֹבִין. Gitt.14b ק׳ למלכות connected with royalty, influential. Snh.III, 4 ואלו הן הק׳ the following are considered relatives (disqualified to act as judges or witnesses); a. fr.Sabb.152a ק׳ נעשו רחוקים near objects have become distant (my senses are dull from old age).Tanḥ. Bshall. 18 ועברה קרובים; Y.Taan.II, 66a top שהגיע לקרובין, v. קָרוּכִין.Fem. קְרוֹבָה. Y. Ber. l. c. ע״ז נראית ק׳ ואינהוכ׳ the idol is apparently near, but in fact distant. Esth. R. to III, 1 Haman reflected in his heart אם אסתר … קְרוֹבָתִי if Esther is a Jewess, she is my relative. Meg.14b חולדה קְרוֹבַתוכ׳ Huldah was a relative of Jeremiahs; a. fr.Pl. קְרוֹבוֹת. Gen. R. s. 18 נשא … מקְרוֹבוֹתָיווכ׳ if a man marries one of his relatives, of him it is said ‘bone of my bones (Gen. 2:23). Lev. R. s. 18 רחוקות נעשי ק׳ ק׳וכ׳ distant objects have become near (things that I could discern at a distance must be brought near me), near objects have become distant, v. supra; a. fr.

Jewish literature > קָרוֹב

93 that

̘. ̈pron. ̆̈pl. thosẽ ̘ˑðæt
1. мест.
1) указ. тот, та, то (иногда этот и пр.) а) указывает на лицо, понятие, событие, предмет, действие, отдаленные по месту или времени б) противополагается this в) указывает на что-л. уже известное говорящему г) заменяет сущ. во избежание его повторения This wine is better than that. ≈ Это вино лучше того. The climate here is like that of France. ≈ Здешний климат похож на климат Франции.
2) (полная форма) ;
(редуцированные формы) относ. а) который, кто, тот который и т. п. б) часто равно in which, on which, at which, for which и т. д. ∙ by that ≈ тем самым, этим like that ≈ таким образом that's that ≈ ничего не поделаешь;
так-то вот that is ≈ то есть now that ≈ теперь, когда with that ≈ вместе с тем
2. нареч.
1) так, до такой степени He was that angry he couldn't say a word. ≈ Он был до того рассержен, что слова не мог вымолвить. The hair was about that long. ≈ Волосы были примерно такой длины.
2) очень, чрезвычайно, в высшей степени I did not take him that seriously. ≈ Я не воспринимала его всерьез. Syn: very
2., extremely
3. (полная форма) ;
(редуцированная форма) союз что, чтобы (служит для введения придаточных предложений дополнительных, цели, следствия и др.) I know all that is necessary. ≈ Я знаю все, что нужно. She knew that he was there. ≈ Она знала, что он был там. это - what is *? что это такое? - who is *? кто это? - is * you, John?, (разговорное) * you, John? это ты, Джон? - are those your children? это ваши дети? - is * all the luggage you are taking? это весь ваш багаж? - those are my orders таковы мои распоряжения это, этого и т. д.;
вот что - *'s not fair это несправедливо - *'s just like her это так на нее похоже, в этом она вся - * is what he told me вот что она мне сказал;
это то, что он мне сказал - *'s how I happened to be here вот как я здесь очутился - they all think * они все так думают - have things come to *? неужели до этого дошло? - and so * is setteled итак, это решено - *'s where he lives вот где он живет, он живет здесь ( эмоционально-усилительно) (разговорное) вот - those are something like shoes вот это туфли - good stuff *! вот это правильно!;
вот это да!, вот это я понимаю! в противопоставлении: - this то - this is new and * is old это новое, а то старое - I prefer these to those я предпочитаю эти тем употр. вместо другого слова или словосочетания, упомянутых выше, во избежание повторения: заменяет группу существительного - the climate there is like * of France климат там похож на климат Франции - her eyes were those of a frightened child у нее были глаза испуганного ребенка - a house like * is described here дом, подобный этому, описан здесь - I have only two pairs of shoes and those are old у меня только две пары ботинок, да и те поношенные заменяет группу глагола, эмоц. - усил. - they must be very curious creatures. - They are * это, должно быть, очень странные создания. - Так оно и есть - it was necessary to act and * promptly нужно было действовать и (действовать) быстро - they are fine chaps. - They are * славные это ребята. - Да, правда - he studied Greek and Latin when he was young, and * at Oxford он учил греческий и латынь, когда он был молодым, и учил их он в Оксфорде - will you help me? - T. I will! ты мне поможешь? - Всенепременно! в коррелятивных местоименных сочетаниях: тот (который) - those that I saw те, кого я видел - Fine Art is * in which the hand, the head, and the heart go together искусство - это такая область, где руки, мысли и душа едины - there was * in her which commanded respect в ней было нечто такое, что вызывало невольное уважение - those who wish to go may do so кто хочет, может уйти - one of those who were present один из присутствовавших (эллиптически) тот который - be * thou know'st thou art будь самим собой первое( из вышеупомянутых) - work and play are both necessary to health;
this gives us rest and * gives us energy и труд и развлечение необходимы для здоровья - одно развивает энергию, другое дает отдых который, которая, которые ((обыкн.) следует непосредственно за определяемым словом;
часто может быть опущено) - this is about all * he has to say это в основном все, что он может сказать - the letter * came yesterday то письмо, которое пришло вчера - this is the house * Jack built вот дом, который построил Джек - the man ( *) you were looking for has come (тот) человек, которого вы искали, пришел - during the years ( *) he had spent abroad в течение (тех) лет, что он провел за границей - the envelope ( *) I put it in (тот) конверт, в который я это положил - the man ( *) we are speaking about (тот) человек, о котором мы говорим - this is he * brought the news (книжное) вот тот, кто принес это известие в сочетании со словами, обозначающими время: когда - the night ( *) we went to the theatre в тот вечер, когда мы ходили в театр - it was the year * we went to England это случилось в тот год, когда мы поехали в Англию ( устаревшее) то что, все что, тот кто, всякий кто (определяемое слово подразумевается) - I earn * I eat, get * I wear я сам зарабатываю то, что я ем и что ношу, я сам добываю себе пищу и одежду - I am * I am я остаюсь самим собой во вводных предложениях: как ни, хоть и - wicked man * he was he would not consent to it как ни был он низок, он не соглашался на это в восклицательных предложениях: - wretch * I am! о я несчастный!, несчастный я! - fool * he is! ну и дурак же он!, дурак он несчастный! в грам. знач. прил.: этот, эта, это;
тот, та, то - everybody is agreed on * point по тому вопросу разногласий нет - since * time с того времени - in those days в те времена - who are those people? кто эти люди? - I only saw him * once я его только один раз и видел - * man will get on! этот человек своего добьется! в противопоставлении this: тот, та, то - this book is interesting and * one is not эта книга интересна(я), а та нет в сочетании с here, there: (просторечие) вон - * here chair and * there table вот этот стул и вон тот стол( эмоционально-усилительно) (разговорное) часто в сочетании с собственным именем: этот, эта, это - when you will have done thumping * piano? когда ты кончишь барабанить на этом (твоем) рояле? - he has * confidence in his theory он непоколебимо уверен в правильности своей теории - what is it about * Mrs. Bellew? I never liked her что там с этой миссис Белью? Она никогда мне не нравилась - * fool of a porter! этот дурак носильщик! - how is * leg of yours? ну, как ваша нога? - it's * wife of his who is to blame винить надо (эту) его жену - I don't like * house of here не нравится мне (этот) ее дом (просторечие) эти - * ill manners эти мои дурные манеры (устаревшее) такой, в такой степени - he blushed to * degree that I felt ill at ease он так покраснел, что мне стало неловко в грам. знач. нареч.: (разговорное) так, до такой степени - if he wanted is * much если он так уж сильно хотел этого - I can't walk * far я не могу идти так далеко - when I was * tall когда я был вот такого роста - he was * angry he couldn't say a word он был до того рассержен, что слова не мог вымолвить (диалектизм) (американизм) столько, так - he talk * much! он столько говорит! - he is * sleepy он такой сонный - he was * tall! он был такого огромного роста в грам. знач. определенного артикля: тот, та, то;
этот, эта, это - he lives in * house across the street он живет в (том) доме через дорогу - what was * noise? что это был за шум? в коррелятивных местоименных сочетаниях: тот (который), та (которая), то (которое) - * part which concerns us (та) часть, которая нас касается - * man we are speaking of has come (тот) человек, о котором мы говорим, уже здесь > (and) *'s * так-то вот;
такие-то дела;
ничего не поделаешь;
так вот, значит > (and) *'s * дело с концом;
на этом точка > all * все это, все такое > and all * и все (такое) прочее;
и так далее > it is not so cold as all * и не так уж холодно > after * после того, что;
после того, как > at * после этого;
затем;
(американизм) при всем при том;
к тому же;
сверх того;
на этом > it is only a snapshot and a poor one at * это всего лишь любительский снимок, да еще и плохой к тому же > and usually I leave it at * и на этом я обычно прекращаю разговор > by * к тому времени;
(под) этим > what do you mean by *? что вы этим хотите сказать?, что вы подразумеваете под этим? > upon * когда;
как (только) ;
после этого;
при этом;
с этими словами > with * she took out her handkerchief с этими словами она вынула носовой платок > *'s all вот и все > *'s it это как раз то, что нам надо;
вот именно, правильно > *'s right! правильно! > *'s more like it это другой разговор, это другое дело > *'s * все, решено > well *'s *;
at least I know where I am going ну что ж, решено;
по крайне мере, я знаю, куда еду > *'ll do довольно, хватит;
этого будет достаточно > *'s done it это решило дело;
это переполнило чашу > *'s a good boy!, *'s a dear! вот и хорошо!, правильно!, молодец!, умник! > like * так;
таким образом > why are you crying like *? чего ты так плачешь? > a man like * подобный человек > o *!, would *! о если бы!, хотелось бы мне, чтобы > come out of *! (сленг) убирайся!, выметайся! > take *! на, получай!, вот тебе! (при ударе) > I wouldn't give * for it я даже вот столечко не дал бы за это вводит сказуемое, дополнительные и аппозитивные придаточные предложения: (то) что - * they were brothers was clear то, что они братья, было ясно - it seems * you have forgotten me вы, кажется, забыли меня - I know * it is unjust я знаю, что это несправедливо - I fear * I cannot come боюсь, что не смогу прийти - he made it clear * he did not agree он дал понять, что не согласен - there is no doubt * we were wrong from the start несомненно, мы были не правы с с самого начала - the fact * I am here non факт, что я здесь - the thought * he would be late oppressed him мысль, что он опоздает, угнетала его вводит придаточные дополнительные предложения и сказуемые с причинным оттенком значения: что, так как;
потому что - I'm sorry * this has happened мне очень жаль, что так случилось - if I complain it is * I want you to do better in future если я и жалуюсь, то потому, что хочу, чтобы вы поступали лучше в будущем вводит придаточные цели (часто so *, in order *): так (чтобы) - let's finish now (so) * we can rest tomorrow давайте закончим сейчас, (так) чтобы завтра можно было отдохнуть - come nearer * I may see you подойдите поближе, чтобы я мог увидеть вас - put it there so * it won't be forgotten положи это туда, чтобы не забыть - they kept quiet so * he might sleep они сидели тихо, чтобы дать ему поспать - study * you may learn учись, а то знать ничего не будешь вводит придаточные: результата: что - I am so tired * I can hardly stand я так устал, что еле стою - the light was so bright * it hurt our eyes свет был такой яркий, ято было больно смотреть основания( обыкн. после вопросительного или отрицательного главного предложения): что - who is he * everybody supports him? кто он такой, что все поддерживают его? пояснительные: что - you have well done * you have come вы хорошо сделали, что пришли необходимого следствия или сопровождения (обыкн. после отрицательного главного предложения): (без того) чтобы - never a month goes by * he does not write to us не проходит и месяца, чтобы он не написал нам - I can't speak but * you try to interrupt me как только я начинаю говорить, вы перебиваете меня вводит придаточные предложения в составе эмфатических сложных предложений: - it was there * I first me her здесь я встретил ее впервые - it was because he didn't work * he failed он потерпел неудачу, потому что не работал вводит восклицательные предложения, выражающие удивление, негодование, сильное желание и т. п.: чтобы, что - * he should behave like that! чтобы он себя так вел! - oh * I migth see you once more! о если бы я мог еще раз увидеть вас! - to think * I knew nothing about it! подумать только, (что) я ничего об этом не знал! - * I should live to see such things! дожил, нечего сказать! - * one so fair should be so false! такая краасивая, и такая лгунья! (устаревшее) вводит придаточное предложение, параллельное предшествующему придаточному, употребленному с другим союзом;
переводится как союз первого придаточного - although the rear was attacked and * fifty men were captured несмотря на то, что нападение было произведено с тыла и несмотря на то, что пятьдесят солдат были захвачены в плен( устаревшее) следует за рядом союзов, не изменяя их значения: - because * так как, потому что - if * если - lest * чтобы не - though * хотя в сочетаниях: - not * не то чтобы;
насколько - I wondrr what happened, not * I care хоть мне и все равно, а все-таки интересно, что там случилось - not * it matters, but the letter has not been sent yet я не хочу сказать, что это так уж важно, но письмо все еще не отправлено - in * тем что;
поскольку;
так как - some of his books have become classics in * they are read by most students interested in anthropology некоторые из его книг стали классическими, их читают почти все студенты, интересующиеся антропологией - but * если бы не - I would have gone with you but * I am so busy я бы пошел с вами, если бы не - he is not such a fool but * he can see it он не так глуп, чтобы не видеть этого после отрацательных предложений: что - I don't deny but * he is right я не отрицаю, что он прав не то чтобы - not but * he believed it himself не то чтобы он верил этому сам - except * кроме того, что;
не считая того, что - it is right except * the accents are omitted это правильно, если не считать того, что пропущены ударения - notwithstanding * (устаревшее) хотя, несмотря на то, что and all ~ и тому подобное, и все такое прочее;
by that тем самым, этим;
like that таким образом assumed ~ при допущении, что assumed ~ при предположении, что assuming ~ допуская, что assuming ~ полагая, что believing ~ полагая, что the book ~ I'm reading книга, которую я читаю and all ~ и тому подобное, и все такое прочее;
by that тем самым, этим;
like that таким образом the explosion was so loud ~ he was deafened взрыв был настолько силен, что оглушил его;
oh, that I knew the truth! о, если бы я знал правду! he was ~ angry he couldn't say a word он был до того рассержен, что слова не мог вымолвить I know ~ it was so я знаю, что это было так;
we eat that we may live мы едим, чтобы поддерживать жизнь I went to this doctor and ~ я обращался к разным врачам;
now that теперь, когда;
with that вместе с тем and all ~ и тому подобное, и все такое прочее;
by that тем самым, этим;
like that таким образом that pron rel. который, кто, тот, который;
the members that were present те из членов, которые присутствовали move ~ предлагать ~'s ~ разг. ничего не поделаешь;
так-то вот;
that is то есть;
not that не потому (или не то), чтобы I went to this doctor and ~ я обращался к разным врачам;
now that теперь, когда;
with that вместе с тем on ground ~ на том основании, что provided ~ в том случае, если provided ~ если только provided ~ однако provided ~ при условии, что that pron rel. который, кто, тот, который;
the members that were present те из членов, которые присутствовали ~ так, до такой степени;
that far настолько далеко;
на такое расстояние;
that much столько ~ pron demonstr. тот, та, то (иногда этот и пр.) ;
this: this wine is better than that это вино лучше того ~ pron (pl those) demonstr. тот, та, то (иногда этот и пр.) ~ cj что, чтобы (служит для введения придаточных предложений дополнительных, цели, следствия и др.) this: ~ pron demonstr. (pl these) этот, эта, это that: take this book and I'll take that one возьмите эту книгу, а я возьму ту ~ day тот день;
that man тот человек ~ так, до такой степени;
that far настолько далеко;
на такое расстояние;
that much столько the explosion was so loud ~ he was deafened взрыв был настолько силен, что оглушил его;
oh, that I knew the truth! о, если бы я знал правду! ~'s ~ разг. ничего не поделаешь;
так-то вот;
that is то есть;
not that не потому (или не то), чтобы ~ day тот день;
that man тот человек ~ так, до такой степени;
that far настолько далеко;
на такое расстояние;
that much столько ~'s it! вот именно!, правильно!;
that's all there is to it ну, вот и все;
this and that разные ~'s ~ разг. ничего не поделаешь;
так-то вот;
that is то есть;
not that не потому (или не то), чтобы ~'s it! вот именно!, правильно!;
that's all there is to it ну, вот и все;
this and that разные ~ pron demonstr. тот, та, то (иногда этот и пр.) ;
this: this wine is better than that это вино лучше того I know ~ it was so я знаю, что это было так;
we eat that we may live мы едим, чтобы поддерживать жизнь I went to this doctor and ~ я обращался к разным врачам;
now that теперь, когда;
with that вместе с тем

Большой англо-русский и русско-английский словарь > that

94 that

1. [ðæt (полная форма); ðət,ðt (редуцированные формы)] pron (pl those)
А demonstr

1. 1) это

what is that? - что это такое?

who is that? - кто это?

is that you, John?, разг. that you, John? - это ты, Джон?

are those your children? - это ваши дети?

is that all the luggage you are taking? - это весь ваш багаж?

those are my orders - таковы /вот/ мои распоряжения

2) это, этого и т. д.; вот что

that's not fair - это несправедливо

that's just like her - это так на неё похоже, в этом она вся

that is what he told me - вот что он мне сказал; это то, что он мне сказал

that's how I happened to be here - вот как я здесь очутился

they all think that - они все так /это/ думают

have things come to that? - неужели до этого дошло?

and so that is settled - итак, это решено

that's where he lives - вот где он живёт, он живёт здесь

3) эмоц.-усил. разг. вот

those are something like shoes - вот это туфли

good stuff that! - вот это правильно /здорово/!; ≅ вот это да!, вот это я понимаю!

4) в противопоставлении this то

this is new and that is old - это новое, а то старое

I prefer these to those - я предпочитаю эти тем

2. употр. вместо другого слова или словосочетания, упомянутых выше, во избежание повторения

1) заменяет группу существительного:

the climate there is like that of France - климат там похож на климат Франции

her eyes were those of a frightened child - у неё были глаза испуганного ребёнка

a house like that is described here - дом, подобный этому, описан здесь

I have only two pairs of shoes and those are old - у меня только две пары ботинок, да и те поношенные

2) заменяет группу глагола, эмоц.-усил.:

they must be very curious creatures. - They are that - это, должно быть, очень странные создания. - Так оно и есть

it was necessary to act and that promptly - нужно было действовать и (действовать) быстро

they are fine chaps. - They are that [That they are not] - славные это ребята. - Да, правда /действительно/ [Вот уж нет]

he studied Greek and Latin when he was young, and that at Oxford - он учил греческий и латынь, когда он был молодым, и учил их он в Оксфорде

will you help me? - That I will! - ты мне поможешь? - Всенепременно! /А как же!/

3. 1) в коррелятивных местоименных сочетаниях тот (который)

those that I saw - те, кого я видел

Fine Art is that in which the hand, the head, and the heart go together - искусство - это такая область, где руки, мысли и душа едины

there was that in her which commanded respect - в ней было нечто такое, что вызывало невольное уважение

those who wish to go may do so - кто хочет, может уйти

one of those who were present - один из присутствовавших

2) эллипт. тот который

be that thou know'st thou art - будь самим собой

4. первое ( из вышеупомянутых)

work and play are both necessary to health; this gives us rest and that gives us energy - и труд и развлечение необходимы для здоровья - одно /первое/ развивает энергию, другое /последнее/ даёт отдых

Б rel

1. 1) который, которая, которые (обыкн. следует непосредственно за определяемым словом; часто может быть опущено)

this is about all that he has to say - это в основном всё, что он может сказать

the letter that came yesterday - то письмо, которое пришло вчера

this is the house that Jack built - вот дом, который построил Джек

the man (that) you were looking for has come - (тот) человек, которого вы искали, пришёл

during the years (that) he had spent abroad - в течение (тех) лет, что он провёл за границей

the envelope (that) I put it in - (тот) конверт, в который я это положил

the man (that) we are speaking about - (тот) человек, о котором мы говорим

this is he that brought the news - книжн. вот тот, кто принёс это известие

2) в сочетании со словами, обозначающими время когда

the night (that) we went to the theatre - в тот вечер, когда мы ходили в театр

it was the year that we went to England - это случилось в тот год /это был тот год/, когда мы поехали в Англию

3) поэт., уст. то что, всё что, тот кто, всякий кто ( определяемое слово подразумевается)

I earn that I eat, get that I wear - я сам зарабатываю то, что я ем и что ношу, я сам добываю себе пищу и одежду

I am that I am - я остаюсь самим собой

2. 1) во вводных предложениях как ни, хоть и

wicked man that he was he would not consent to it - как ни был он низок /хоть и дурной человек он был/, он не соглашался на это

2) в восклицательных предложениях:

wretch that I am! - о я несчастный!, несчастный я!

fool that he is! - ну и дурак же он!, дурак он несчастный!

В в грам. знач. прил.

1. 1) этот, эта, это; тот, та, то

everybody is agreed on that point - по тому /этому/ вопросу разногласий нет

since that time [moment, day, year] - с того /с этого/ времени [момента, дня, года]

in those days - в те времена

who are those people? - кто эти люди?

I only saw him that once - я его только один раз /тогда/ и видел

that man will get on! - этот человек своего добьётся!

2) в противопоставлении this тот, та, то

this book is interesting and that one is not - эта книга интересна(я), а та нет

3) в сочетании с here, there прост. вон

that here chair and that there table - вот этот стул и вон тот стол

2. эмоц.-усил. разг.

1) часто в сочетании с собственным именем этот, эта, это

when you will have done thumping that piano? - когда ты кончишь барабанить на этом (твоём) рояле?

he has that confidence in his theory - он непоколебимо уверен в правильности своей теории

what is it about that Mrs. Bellew? I never liked her - что там с этой миссис Белью? Она никогда мне не нравилась

that fool of a porter! - этот дурак носильщик!

how is that leg of yours? - ну, как ваша нога?

it's that wife of his who is to blame - винить надо (эту) его жену

I don't like that house of hers - не нравится мне (этот) её дом

2) (вм. those) прост. эти

that ill manners - эти мои дурные манеры

3. уст. такой, в такой степени

he blushed to that degree that I felt ill at ease - он так /до такой степени/ покраснел, что мне стало неловко

Г в грам. знач. нареч.

1) разг. так, до такой степени

if he wanted it that much - если он так уж сильно хотел этого

I can't walk that far - я не могу идти так далеко

when I was that tall - когда я был вот такого роста

he was that angry he couldn't say a word - он был до того рассержен, что слова не мог вымолвить

2) диал., амер. столько, так

he talks that much! - он столько говорит!

he is that sleepy - он такой сонный

he was that tall! - он был такого огромного роста /такой высокий/!

Д в грам. знач. определённого артикля

1. тот, та, то; этот, эта, это

he lives in that house across the street - он живёт в (том) доме через дорогу

what was that noise? - что это был за шум?

2. в коррелятивных местоимённых сочетаниях тот (который), та (которая), то (которое)

that part which concerns us - (та) часть, которая нас касается

that man we are speaking of has come - (тот) человек, о котором мы говорим, уже здесь /уже пришёл/

♢

(and) that's that - а) так-то вот; такие-то дела; ничего не поделаешь; так вот, значит; б) дело с концом; на этом точка

all that - всё это, всё такое

and all that - и всё (такое) прочее; и так далее

it is not so cold as all that - и не так уж холодно

after that - после того, что; после того, как

at that - а) после этого; затем; б) амер. при всём при том; к тому же; сверх того; it is only a snapshot and a poor one at that - это всего лишь любительский снимок, да ещё и плохой к тому же; в) на этом; and usually I leave it at that - и на этом я обычно прекращаю разговор

by that - а) к тому времени; б) (под) этим

what do you mean by that? - что вы этим хотите сказать?, что вы подразумеваете под этим?

upon /with/ that - а) когда; как (только); после этого, б) при этом; в) с этими словами; with that she took out her handkerchief - с этими словами она вынула носовой платок

that's all - вот и всё

that's it - это как раз то, что нам надо; вот именно, правильно

that's right! - правильно!

that's more like it - это другой разговор, это другое дело

that's that - всё, решено

well that's that; at least I know where I am going - ну что ж, решено; по крайней мере, я знаю, куда еду

that'll do - довольно, хватит; этого будет достаточно

that's done it - это решило дело; это переполнило чашу

that's a good boy!, that's a dear! - вот и хорошо!, правильно!, молодец!, умник!

like that - так; таким /подобным/ образом

why are you crying like that? - чего ты так плачешь?

a man like that - подобный человек

o that!, would that! - о если бы!, хотелось бы мне, чтобы

come out of that! - сл. убирайся!, выметайся!

take that! - на, получай!, вот тебе! ( при ударе)

this and that см. this ♢

I wouldn't give that for it - я даже вот столечко не дал бы за это
2. [ðæt (полная форма); ðət (редуцированная форма)]cj
1. вводит сказуемые, дополнительные и аппозитивные придаточные предложения (то) что

that they were brothers was clear - то, что они братья, было ясно

it seems that you have forgotten me - вы, кажется, забыли меня

I know [say] that it is unjust - я знаю [говорю], что это несправедливо

I fear that I cannot come - боюсь, что не смогу прийти

he made it clear that he did not agree - он дал понять, что не согласен

there is no doubt that we were wrong from the start - несомненно, мы были не правы с самого начала

the fact that I am here - тот факт, что я здесь

the thought that he would be late oppressed him - мысль, что он опоздает, угнетала его

2. вводит придаточные дополнительные предложения и сказуемые с причинным оттенком значения что, так как; потому что

I'm sorry that this has happened - мне очень жаль, что так случилось

if I complain it is that I want you to do better in future - если я и жалуюсь, то потому, что хочу, чтобы вы поступали лучше в будущем

3. вводит придаточные цели ( часто so that, in order that) так (чтобы)

let's finish now (so) that we can rest tomorrow - давайте закончим сейчас, (так) чтобы завтра можно было отдохнуть

come nearer that I may see you - подойдите поближе, чтобы я мог увидеть вас

put it there so that it won't be forgotten - положи это туда, чтобы не забыть

they kept quiet so that he might sleep - они сидели тихо, чтобы дать ему поспать

study that you may learn - ≅ учись, а то знать ничего не будешь

4. вводит придаточные

1) результата (обыкн. с so, such в главном предложении) что

I am so tired that I can hardly stand - я так устал, что еле стою

the light was so bright that it hurt our eyes - свет был такой яркий, что было больно смотреть

2) основания (обыкн. после вопросительного или отрицательного главного предложения) что

who is he that everybody supports him? - кто он такой, что все поддерживают его?

3) пояснительные что

you have well done that you have come - вы хорошо сделали, что пришли

4) необходимого следствия или сопровождения (обыкн. после отрицательного главного предложения) (без того) чтобы

never a month goes by that he does not write to us - не проходит и месяца, чтобы он не написал нам

I can't speak but that you try to interrupt me - как только я начинаю говорить, вы перебиваете меня

5. вводит придаточные предложения в составе эмфатических сложных предложений:

it was there that I first met her - здесь я встретил её впервые

it was because he didn't work that he failed - он потерпел неудачу, потому что не работал

6. вводит восклицательные предложения, выражающие удивление, негодование, сильное желание и т. п. чтобы, что

that he should behave like that! - чтобы он себя так вёл!

oh that I might see you once more! - о если бы я мог ещё раз увидеть вас!

to think that I knew nothing about it! - подумать только, (что) я ничего об этом не знал!

that I should live to see such things! - дожил, нечего сказать!

that one so fair should be so false! - такая красивая, и такая лгунья!

7. уст. вводит придаточное предложение, параллельное предшествующему придаточному, употреблённому с другим союзом; переводится как союз первого придаточного

although the rear was attacked and that fifty men were captured - несмотря на то, что нападение было произведено с тыла и несмотря на то, что пятьдесят солдат были захвачены в плен

8. уст. следует за рядом союзов, не изменяя их значения:

because that - так как, потому что

if that - если

lest that - чтобы не

though that - хотя

9. в сочетаниях:

not that - а) не то чтобы; б) насколько; wonder what happened, not that I care - ≅ хоть мне и всё равно, а всё-таки интересно, что там случилось; not that it matters, but the letter has not been sent yet - я не хочу сказать, что это так уж важно, но письмо всё ещё не отправлено

in that - тем что; поскольку; так как

some of his books have become classics in that they are read by most students interested in anthropology - некоторые из его книг стали классическими, их читают почти все студенты, интересующиеся антропологией

but that - а) если бы не; I would have gone with you but that I am so busy - я бы пошёл с вами, если бы я не был так занят; б) чтобы не; he is not such a fool but that he can see it - он не так глуп, чтобы не видеть этого; в) после отрицательных предложений что; I don't deny [doubt] but that he is right - я не отрицаю [сомневаюсь], что он прав; г) не то чтобы; not but that he believed it himself - не то чтобы он верил этому сам

except that - кроме того, что; не считая того, что

it is right except that the accents are omitted - это правильно, если не считать того, что пропущены ударения

save that - уст. = except that [см. except II 2]

notwithstanding that - уст. хотя, несмотря на то, что

НБАРС > that

95 that

1. adj

цей, ця, це; той, та, те

since that time (day) — з того (з цього) часу (дня)

this book is interesting and that one is not — ця книжка цікава, а та — ні

how is that leg of yours? — ну, як ваша нога?

2. adv розм.

так, до такої міри

that much — стільки

that far — так далеко

I can't walk that far — я не можу йти так далеко

he was that angry he couldn't say a word — він був такий сердитий, що не міг вимовити й слова

3. pron (pl those)

1) це

what is that? — що це таке?

who is that? — хто це (такий)?

2) ось що

that is what she told me — ось що вона мені сказала

3) те

this is new and that is old — це нове, а те старе

4) який, яка, які

the letter that came yesterday — той лист, який прийшов учора

the man that we are speaking about — це та людина, про яку ми говоримо

5) коли

the night that we went to the theatre — в той вечір, коли ми ходили до театру

6) він, вона; той, та

I am that I am — я залишаюся самим собою

4. conj

що; щоб; так, щоб

that they were sisters was clear — те, що вони сестри, було ясно

I'm sorry that this has happened — мені шкода, що так сталося

come nearer that I may see you — підійдіть ближче, щоб я міг побачити вас

oh that I might see you once more! — о, коли б я міг ще раз побачити вас!

because that — тому що

but that — коли б (якби, якщо б) не

I would have gone with you but that I am so busy — я б пішов з вами, якби я не був такий зайнятий

if that — якщо

in that — оскільки, бо

lest that — щоб не

though that — хоч

and all that — і тому подібне

by that — тим самим, цим

like that — таким чином

that's that — розм. нічого не вдієш; ось так

that is (to say) — тобто

not that — не те щоб

that'Н do — досить, достатньо

that won't do — так справа не піде; так не годиться

this and that — різне

now that — тепер, коли

with that — разом з тим

notwithstanding that — незважаючи на те, що

* * *
I
pron (pl those) А dem

1) це

what is that — є що це таке?; that you, John? це ти, Джон?; are those your children є це ваші дітиє; це, цього е т. д.; от що

that's not fair — це несправедливо

that's just like her — це так на неї схоже, у цьому вона вся

have things come to that — є невже до цього дійшло?; and so that is settled отже, це вирішено; эмоц.- підсил. ось, от

those are something like shoes — ось це туфлі

good stuff that! — от це правильно /здброво/!; = от це я розумію!; у протиставленні this те

this is new and that is old — це нове, а те старе

2) викор. замість іншого слова або словосполучення, згаданих вище, щоб уникнути повторення заміняє групу іменника

the climate there is like that of France — клімат там схожий на клімат Франції

I have only two pairs of shoes and those are old — у мене тільки дві пари черевик, та е ті поношені; заміняє групу дієслова, эмоц.- підсил.

they must be very curious creatures.- They are that — це, мабуть, дуже дивні створіння. - Так воно, є

3) у корелятивних займенникових сполученнях той ( який)

Fine art is that in which the hand, the head, and the heart go together — мистецтво - це така область, де руки, думки е душа єдині

those who wish to go may do so — хто хоче, може піти; эліпт. той який

be that thou know'st thou art — будь самим собою

4) перше ( з вищезгаданих)

work and play are both necessary to health. this gives us rest and that gives us energy, — праця е розвага необхідні для здоров'я - одне /перше/ розвиває енергію, інше /останнє/ дає відпочинок Б rel

5) який, яка, які (звичн. йде безпосередньо за обумовленим словом; часто може бути опущене)

this is about all that he has to say — це в основному все, що він може сказати

the letter that came yesterday — той лист, що прийшов вчора

the man (that) you were looking for has come — (т людина, яку ви шукали, прийшла)

during the years (that) he had spent abroad — протягом ( тих) років, що він провів за кордоном

the envelope (that) I put it in — ( той) конверт, у який я це поклав

this is he that brought the news — от той, хто приніс цю звістку; у сполученні зі словами, що позначають час коли

the night (that) we went to the theatre — у той вечір, коли ми ходили в театр; пoeт.; icт. те що, всі що, той хто, усякий хто ( обумовлене слово мається на увазі)

I am that I am — я залишаюся самим собою

6) у ввідних реченнях як не, хоч е

wicked man that he was he would not consent to it — хоч, дурний він був, він не погоджувався на це; в окличних реченнях

wretch that I am! — о я нещасний!, нещасний я!

fool that he is! — ну е дурень же він!, дурень він нещасний! В пpикм.

7) цей, ця, це; той, та, те

since that time [moment, day, year] — з того /із цього/ часу [моменту, дня, року]

in those days y — ті часи

that man will get on! — ця людина свого доможеться!; у протиставлення this той, та, те

this book is interesting and that one is not — ця книга цікава(я), а та ні; у сполученні з here, there прост ось, он

that here chair and that there table — ось цей стілець, он той стіл

8) эмоц.- підсил. часто в сполученні із власним ім'ям цей, ця, це

how is that leg of yours — є ну, як ваша ногає

I don't like that house of hers — не подобається мені ( цей) її будинок; (зам. those) ці

that ill manners — ці мої дурні манери

9) icт. такий, настільки, так

he blushed to that degree that I felt ill at ease — він так /настільки / почервонів, що мені стало ніяково Г пpиcл. так, настільки

I can't walk that far — я не можу йти так далеко; дiaл., aмep. стільки, так

he talks that much! — він стільки говорить!

he is that sleepy — він такий сонний Д визначеного артикля

10) той, та, те; цей, ця, це

what was that noise — є що це був за шумє

11) у корелятивних займенникових сполученнях той ( який), та (як, те (яке))

that part which concerns us — (т частина, що нас стосується)

(and) that 's that — так-то от; такі-то справи; нічого не поробиш; отож, значить; на цьому крапка

and all that, — все ( таке) інше;, так далі

after that — після того, що; після того, як

at that — після цього; потім; aмep. при всьому при тому; до того ж; поверх того на цьому

and usually I leave it at that, — на атом я звичайно припиняю розмову

by that — на той час; ( під) цим

what do you mean by that — є що ви цим хочете сказати?

upon /with/that — коли; як ( тільки); після цього; при цьому; з цими словами

with that she took out her handkerchief — з цими словами вона вийняла носову хустинку

that 's all that — все

that's a good boy!, that's a dear! — от, добре, правильно!, молодець!, розумник!

like that — так; таким /подібним/ чином

why are you crying like that — є чого ти так плачеш?

a man like that — подібна людина

come out of that! — cл. забирайся!, вимітайся!

take that! — на, тримай!, от тобі! ( при ударі)

this and that — див. this
II
cj

1) вводить присудкові, додаткові е аппозитивні придаткові речення (те) що

that they were brothers was clear — те, що вони брати, було ясно

the thought that he would be late oppressed him — думка, що він спізниться, гнітила його

2) вводить придаткові додаткові реченяя е присудки із причинним відтінком значення що, тому що; тому що

I'm sorry that this has happened — мені дуже шкода, що так трапилося

3) вводить придаткову мету (часто so that, in order that) так ( щоб)

let's finish now (so) that we can rest tomorrow — давайте закінчимо зараз, ( так) щоб завтра можна було відпочити

they kept quiet so that he might sleep — вони сиділи тихо, щоб дати йому поспати

4) вводить підрядне результату (звичн. з so, such y головному реченні) що

I am so tired that I can hardly stand — я так стомився, що ледве стою; причини (звичн. після питального або заперечувального головного речення) що

who is he- everybody supports him — є хто він такий, що всі підтримують йогоє; з'ясувальні що

you have well done that you have come — ви добре зробили, що прийшли; необхідного наслідку або супроводу (звичн. після заперечувального головного речення) (без того) щоб

never a month goes by that he does not write to us — не проходить, місяця, щоб він не написав нам

5) вводить підрядні речення в склад емфатичних складних речень

it was there that I first met her — тут Я зустрів її вперше

6) вводить окличні речення, що виражають подив, обурення, сильне бажання щоб, що

that he should behave like that! — щоб він себе так вів!

that one so fair should be so false! — така гарна, така брехуха!

7) icт. вводить підрядне речення, паралельне попередньому підрядному, вжитому з іншим союзом; перекладається як союз першого підрядного

although the rear was attacked and that fifty men were captured — незважаючи на те, що атака був проведена з тилу е незважаючи на те, що п'ятдесят солдатів були захоплені в полон

8) icт. йде за рядом союзів, не змінюючи їхнього значення

because that — тому що, тому що

if that — якщо

lest that — щоб не

though that — хоча

9) у сполученнях

not that — не те щоб; наскільки

not that it matters, but the letter has not been sent yet — я не хочу сказати, що це так вже, важливо, але лист усе ще не відправлений

in that — тим що; оскільки; тому що

some of his books have become classics in that they are read by most students interested in anthropology — деякі з його книг стали класичними, їх читають майже всі студенти, що цікавляться антропологією

but that — якби не

I would have gone with you but that I am so busy — я б пішов з вами, якби я не був так зайнятий; щоб не

he is not such a fool but-that he can see it — він не так дурний, щоб не бачити цього; після негативних речень що

I don't deny [doubt]bat that he is right — я не заперечую [сумніваюся], що він правий; не те щоб

not but that he believed it himself — не те щоб він вірив цьому сам

except that — крім того, що; не вважаючи того, що

save that — icт. = except that [див. except 2]

notwithstanding that — icт. хоча, незважаючи на те, що

English-Ukrainian dictionary > that

96 GANGA

walk

* * *

I)

(geng; gekk, gengum; genginn), v.

1) to walk (reið jarl, en Karkr gekk);

2) to go;

ganga heim, to go home;

ganga braut, to go away;

ganga til hvílu, to go to bed;

ganga á skip, to go on board;

ganga af skipi, to go ashore;

with infin., ganga sofa or at sofa, to go to sleep;

ganga at eiga konu, to marry a woman;

3) to go about grazing, to graze (kálfrinn gekk í túni um sumarit);

4) of a ship, to run, sail (gekk skipit brátt út á haf);

5) to stretch out, extend, project (nes mikit gekk í sæ út);

6) of report, tales, to be current (litlar sögur megu ganga af hesti mínum);

7) to prevail;

gekk þaðan af í Englandi Valska, thereafter the French tongue prevailed in E.;

8) of money, to be current (peningar þeir, sem nú ganga);

of laws, to be valid (þau lög, er gengu á Uppsalaþingi);

of sickness, plague, famine, to rage (þá gekk landfarsótt, drepsótt, hallæri);

9) to go on, last (gnustu þá saman vápnin, ok gekk þat um hríð);

impers., gekk því lengi, so it went on for a long while;

10) láta ganga e-t, to let go on;

láta höggin ganga, to rain blows;

Birkibeinar létu ganga lúðrana, blew the trumpets vigorously;

11) to succeed;

ef þat gengr eigi, if that will not do;

impers., svá þykt, at þeim gekk þar eigi at fara, so close, that they could not go on there;

þeim gekk ekki fyrir nesit, they could not clear the ness;

12) to turn out, go in a specified way;

ganga andæris, to go all wrong;

mart gengr verr en varir, many a thing goes worse than is looked for;

gekk þeim lítt atsókinn, they made little progress with the attack;

impers., e-m gengr vel (illa), one fares (goes on, gets on) well (badly);

13) with acc., ganga e-n á bak, to force one to go backwards (harm gengr bjöninn á bak);

14) with dat., to discharge (gekk bann þá blóði);

15) with preps. and adverbs:

ganga af e-u, to depart from, leave (þá gekk af honum móðrinn);

ganga af vitinu, to go out of one’s wits;

ganga af trú sinni, to apostatize;

to pass (síðan gengu af páskarnir);

to go off (gekk þegar af höfuðit);

to be left as surplus (þat er af skuldinni gekk);

nú gengr honum hey af, now he has some hay left;

ganga af sér, to go to extremities, to go beyond oneself (mjök ganga þeir fóstbrœðr nú af sé);

ganga aptr, to revert (return) to the former proprietor (síðan gengu þau lönd aptr undir Árna);

to be void, annulled (þá skal kaup aptr ganga);

of a ghost, to walk again; of a door, to close, shut (gekk eigi aptr hurðin);

ganga at e-m, to attack one;

ganga at e-u, to agree to, accept a choice or offer (Flosi gekk fljótt at þessu öllu); to fit (skaltu fá mér lukla þá, sem ganga at kistum yðrum);

ganga á e-t, to encroach upon (ganga á ríki e-s); to break (ganga á orð sín, eiða, grið, sættir, trygðir); to pierce, penetrate;

hann var í panzara, er ekki gekk á, that was proof against any weapons;

ganga á vald e-s or e-m, ganga á hönd (hendr) e-m, to submit to, give oneself up to, surrender to one;

ganga á bak e-u, to contravene;

ganga eptir e-u, to go for, go to fetch (göngum heim eptir verðinu); to pursue, claim;

ganga eptir, to prove true, be fulfilled (þetta gekk allt eptir, sem M. sagði fyrir);

ganga frá e-u, to part with, lose (sumir munu ganga frá öllu fénu);

ganga fram, to step forward;

ganga fram vel, to go forward bravely, in a battle;

to come to pass, come into execution (skal þess bíða, er þetta gengr fram);

to increase (fé Hall gerðar gekk fram ok gørðist allmikit);

to depart this life (H. bóndi gengr fram til frænda sinna);

ganga fyrir e-n, to present oneself before one (ganga fyrir konung);

ganga fyrir e-u, to take charge of, manage (var þar mart fólk, en húsbóndi gekk svá fyrir, at ekkert skorti); to yield to, be swayed by (hann gekk þá fyrir fortölum hennar);

ganga í gegn e-m, to set oneself against one;

ganga í gegn e-u, to confess, acknowledge;

maðr gengr í gegn, at á braut kveðst tekit hafa, the man confessed and said that he had taken it away;

ganga í mál, to undertake a case;

ganga með e-m (of a woman), to marry;

ganga með barni, to be with child;

ganga með burði (of animals), to be with young;

ganga með e-u, to assist in, plead (ganga með máli, bónorði);

ganga milli (á m., í m.), to go between, intercede;

ganga móti (á m., í m.) e-m, to go to meet one;

ganga móti e-u, to resist, oppose;

to confess, = ganga í gegn, ganga við e-u;

ganga nær e-m, to be troublesome to one (þótti hón œrit nær ganga Þórgerði);

ganga e-m nær, to approach, come near to one (sá hefir á brott komizt, er næst gekk Gunnari um alla hluti);

ganga saman, to marry;

of an agreement, bargain, to be brought about;

saman gekk kaupit með þeim, they came to a bargain;

ganga sundr (í s.), to go asunder, part;

ganga til, to go up to a thing (gangit til ok hyggit at); of the wind, to veer (veðrit gekk til útsuðrs);

e-m gengr e-t til e-s, one has some reason for doing a thing;

en þat gekk mér til þess (that was my reason), at ek ann þér eigi;

hversu hefir ykkr til gengit, how have you fared?

Loka gekk lítt til, it fared ill with L.;

ganga um e-t, to go about a thing;

ganga um beina, to wait upon guests;

ganga um sættir, to go between, as peacemaker;

ganga um e-n, to befall, happen to one (þess, er um margan gengr guma); of the wind, to go round, veer (gekk um veðrit ok styrmdi at þeim); to manage (fékk hón svá um gengit, at);

ganga undan, to escape to absent oneself;

g. undir e-t, to take upon oneself, undertake (a duty);

ganga undir e-n, to subject oneself to;

ganga upp, to be wasted (of money);

to get loose, to he torn loose (þeir glímdu svá at upp gengu stokkar allir á húsinu);

of a storm, gale, to get up, rise (veðr gekk upp);

of an ice-bound river, áin var gengin upp, swollen with ice;

ganga við staf, to walk with a stick;

ganga við e-u or e-t, to avow;

ganga yfir e-t, to go beyond, disregard (hann vildi eigi ganga yfir þat, er hann vissi réttast);

ganga yfir e-n, to overcome, to befall, happen to one;

slíkt sem yfir hefir gengit, all that has happened;

eitt skal yfir okkr ganga, we shall share one fate;

16) refl., gangast.

II)

f.

1) walking (hann mœddist í göngu);

vera í göngu, to be on foot, to walk;

2) course (ganga tungls, vinds).

* * *

pret. gekk or gékk, 2nd pers. gékkt, mod. gékst; pl. gengu, geingu, or géngu, and an old poët. gingu; gengengu in Vsp. 12 is a mere misspelling (vide Sæm. Möb. 258); pres. geng, pl. göngum; pret. subj. gengi (geingi); imperat. gakk and gakktú; with the neg. suffix geng-at, gengr-at, gékk-at, gakk-attu, passim; a middle form göngumk firr, go from me, Gm. 1: a contracted form gá occurs now and then in mod. hymns; it is not vernacular but borrowed from Germ. and Dan.: [cp. Ulf. gaggan; A. S. and Hel. gangan; Scot. and North. E. gang, mod. Engl. go; Dan.-Swed. gange or gå; Germ. gehen; Ivar Aasen ganga: Icel., Scots, and Norsemen have preserved the old ng, which in Germ. and Swed.-Dan. only remains in poetry or in a special sense, e. g. in Germ. compds.]

A. To go:

I. to walk; reið jarl en Karkr gékk, Fms. i. 210, Rm. 1, 2, 6, 14, 23, 24, 30, Edda 10, Grág. ii. 95, passim; ganga leiðar sinnar, to go one’s way, Fms. x. 290, Krók. 26: adding acc., g. alla leið, Fms. xi. 202, 299; g. berg, to climb a cliff; g. afréttar, to search the fell-pastures (fjallganga), Háv. 39; also g. ( to climb) í fjall, í kletta, Fms. x. 313: Icel. also say, ganga skó og sokka, to wear out shoes and socks; hann gékk tvenna skó; ganga berserks gang, q. v.

β. absol. to go a-begging, Grág. i. 226, 232, Ísl. ii. 25; ganga vergang, húsgang, id. (göngumaðr).

II. adding adverbs, infinitives, adjectives, or the like,

α. an adverb denoting direction; g. út ok inn, Vkv. 4, Lv. 26; g. inn, Fms. i. 16, vi. 33; g. út, to go out, Lat. exire, Nj. 194; g. aptr, to return, Fms. x. 352; g. fram, to step forward, Hm. 1, Eg. 165; g. upp, to go up, ashore; g. ofan, niðr, to go down; g. heiman, 199; g. heim, to go home; gakk hingat, come hither! 488; g. móti, í gegn e-m, to go against, to meet one; g. braut, to go away; g. til e-s, or at e-m, to go to one; g. frá e-m, to leave one; g. með e-m, to go with one; g. hjá, to pass by; g. saman, to go together; g. yfir, to go over; g. gegnum, to go through; g. undir, to go under; g. undan, fyrir, to go before; g. eptir, to go behind; g. um, to rove, stroll about, and so on passim; g. í sæti, to go to one’s seat, take a seat, Eg. 551; g. til hvílu, to go to bed, Nj. 201; g. til matar, to go to dinner, Sturl. iii. 111, Eg. 483; g. til vinnu, verks, to go to one’s work, cp. Hm. 58; g. í kirkju, to go to church, Rb. 82; g. á fjall, to go on the fells, Hrafn. 34; g. á skip, to go on board, Fms. x. 10; g. af skipi, to go ashore.

β. with infin., in old poems often dropping ‘at;’ ganga sofa, to go to sleep, Fm. 27; g. at sofa, Hm. 19; g. vega, to go to fight, Vsp. 56, Ls. 15; g. at eiga konu, to go to be married, Grág. i. 318.

γ. with an adj.; g. hræddr, to be afraid; g. úviss, to be in ignorance, etc., Fms. vii. 271, Sks. 250, 688.

2. in a more special sense; g. til einvígis, bardaga, to go to a duel, battle, Nj. 64; g. á hólm (hólmganga), Eg. 504, 506; g. á eintal, Nj. 103; g. til máls við e-n, to speak to one, Eg. 199, 764; g. í glímu, to go a-wrestling, Ísl. ii. 246; g. á fang, id., Ld. 206; g. í danz, to go a-dancing; g. til skripta, to go to shrift, Hom. 157; g. at brúðkaupi, to go to be married, Fms. vii. 278; g. í skóla, klaustr, to go to school, go into a cloister (as an inmate), (hence skóla-genginn, a school-man, scholar), Bs. passim; g. í þjónustu, to take service, Nj. 268; g. í lið með e-m, to enter one’s party, side with one, 100; g. í lög, to enter a league with one; g. ór lögum, to go out of a league, passim; g. í félag, ór félagi, id.; g. á mala, to take service as a soldier, 121; g. á hönd, g. til handa, to submit to one as a liegeman, surrender, Eg. 19, 33, Ó. H. 184, Fms. vii. 180; g. á vald e-m, to give oneself up, Nj. 267; g. á hendr e-m, to encroach upon, Ver. 56; g. í skuld, to bail, Grág. i. 232, Dipl. ii. 12; g. í trúnað, to warrant, Fms. xi. 356; g. til trygða, Nj. 166, and g. til griða, to accept truce, surrender, Fas. ii. 556; g. í mál, to enter, undertake a case, Nj. 31; g. í ánauð, to go into bondage, Eg. 8; g. til lands, jarðar, ríkis, arfs, to take possession of …, 118, Stj. 380, Grág., Fms. passim; g. til fréttar, to go to an oracle, take auspices, 625. 89; g. til Heljar, a phrase for to die, Fms. x. 414; g. nær, to go nigh, go close to, press hard on, Ld. 146, 322, Fms. xi. 240 (where reflex.); var sá viðr bæði mikill og góðr því at Þorkell gékk nær, Th. kept a close eye on it, Ld. 316.

B. Joined with prepp. and adverbs in a metaph. sense:—g. af, to depart from, go off; þá gékk af honum móðrinn ok sefaðisk hann, Edda 28; þá er af honum gékk hamremin, Eg. 125, Eb. 136, Stj. 118; g. af sér, to go out of or beyond oneself; mjök g. þeir svari-bræðr nú af sér, Fbr. 32; í móti Búa er hann gengr af sér ( rages) sem mest, Fb. i. 193; þá gékk mest af sér ranglæti manna um álnir, Bs. i. 135: so in the mod. phrases, g. fram af sér, to overstrain oneself; and g. af sér, to fall off, decay: to forsake, g. af trú, to apostatize, Fms. ii. 213; g. af vitinu, to go out of one’s wits, go mad, Post. 656 C. 31; g. af Guðs boðorðum, Stj. passim: to pass. Páskar g. af, Ld. 200: to be left as surplus (afgangr), Rb. 122, Grág. i. 411, K. Þ. K. 92:—g. aptr, to walk again, of a ghost (aptrganga), Ld. 58, Eb. 278, Fs. 131, 141, passim; and absol., g. um híbýli, to hunt, Landn. 107: to go back, be void, of a bargain, Gþl. 491:—g. at e-m, to go at, attack, Nj. 80, 160: to press on, Grág. i. 51, Dipl. ii. 19 (atgangr): g. at e-u, to accept a choice, Nj. 256; g. at máli, to assist, help, 207: to fit, of a key, lykla þá sem g. at kístum yðrum, Finnb. 234, Fbr. 46 new Ed., N. G. L. i. 383: medic. to ail, e-ð gengr at e-m; ok gengr at barni, and if the bairn ails, 340, freq. in mod. usage of ailment, grief, etc.:—g. á e-t, to go against, encroach upon; ganga á ríki e-s, Fms. i. 2; g. upp á, to tread upon, vii. 166; hverr maðr er ólofat gengr á mál þeirra, who trespasses against their measure, Grág. i. 3: to break, g. á orð, eiða, sættir, trygðir, grið, Finnb. 311, Fms. i. 189, Ld. 234; g. á bak e-u, to contravene, Ísl. ii. 382; ganga á, to go on with a thing, Grág. ii. 363; hence the mod. phrase, mikið gengr á, much going on; hvað gengr á, what is going on? það er farið að g. á það (of a task or work or of stores), it is far advanced, not much left:—g. eptir, to go after, pursue, claim (eptirgangr), Nj. 154, Þórð. 67, Fms. vii. 5; g. eptir e-m, to humour one who is cross, in the phrase, g. eptir e-m með grasið í skónum; vertu ekki að g. eptir stráknum; hann vill láta g. eptir ser (of a spoilt boy, cross fellow): to prove true, follow, hón mælti mart, en þó gékk þat sumt eptir, Nj. 194; eptir gékk þat er mér bauð hugr um, Eg. 21, Fms. x. 211:—g. fram, to go on well in a battle, Nj. 102, 235, Háv. 57 (framgangr): to speed, Nj. 150, Fms. xi. 427: to grow, increase (of stock), fé Hallgerðar gékk fram ok varð allmikit, Nj. 22; en er fram gékk mjök kvikfé Skallagríms, Eg. 136, Vígl. 38: to come to pass, skal þess bíða er þetta gengr fram, Nj. 102, Fms. xi. 22: to die, x. 422:—g. frá, to leave (a work) so and so; g. vel frá, to make good work; g. ílla frá, to make bad work; það er ílla frá því gengið, it is badly done:—g. fyrir, to go before, to yield to, to be swayed by a thing; heldr nú við hót, en ekki geng ek fyrir slíku, Fms. i. 305; þó at vér gangim heldr fyrir blíðu en stríðu, ii. 34, Fb. i. 378, Hom. 68; hvárki gékk hann fyrir blíðyrðum né ógnarmálum, Fms. x. 292; hann gékk þá fyrir fortülum hennar, Bs. i. 742: in mod. usage reflex., gangast fyrir íllu, góðu: to give away, tók hann þá at ganga fyrir, Fb. i. 530: Icel. now say, reflex., gangast fyrir, to fall off, from age or the like (vide fyrirgengiligr): to prevent, skal honum þá eigi fyrnska fyrir g., N. G. L. i. 249; þá er hann sekr þrem mörkum nema nauðsyn gangi fyrir, 14; at þeim gangi lögleg forföll fyrir, Gþl. 12:—g. í gegn, to go against, to meet, in mod. usage to deny, and so it seems to be in Gþl. 156; otherwise in old writers it always means the reverse, viz. to avow, confess; maðr gengr í gegn, at á braut kveðsk tekit hafa, the man confessed and said that he had taken it away, Ísl. ii. 331; ef maðr gengr í gegn legorðinu, Grág. i. 340; sá goði er í gegn gékk ( who acknowledged) þingfesti hans, 20; hann iðraðisk úráðs síns, ok gékk í gegn at hann hefði saklausan selt herra sinn, Sks. 584,—this agrees with the parallel phrase, g. við e-t, mod. g. við e-u, to confess, both in old and mod. usage, id.:—g. hjá, to pass by, to waive a thing, Fms. vi. 168:—g. með, to go with one, to wed, marry (only used of a woman, like Lat. nubere), þú hefir þvert tekit at g. með mér, Ld. 262, Sd. 170, Grág. i. 178, Þiðr. 209, Gkv. 2. 27, Fms. xi. 5: medic., g. með barni, to go with child, i. 57; with acc. (barn), Bs. i. 790, and so in mod. usage; a mother says, sama sumarið sem eg gékk með hann (hana) N. N., (meðgöngutími); but dat. in the phrase, vera með barni, to be with child; g. með burði, of animals, Sks. 50, Stj. 70; g. með máli, to assist, plead, Eg. 523, Fms. xi. 105, Eb. 210; g. með e-u, to confess [Dan. medgaae], Stj., but rare and not vernacular:—g. milli, to go between, intercede, esp. as a peacemaker, passim (milli-ganga, meðal-ganga):—g. í móti, to resist, Nj. 90, 159, 171: of the tide, en þar gékk í móti útfalls-straumr, Eg. 600:—g. saman, to go together, marry, Grág. i. 324, Fms. xi. 77: of a bargain, agreement, við þetta gékk saman sættin, Nj. 250; saman gékk kaupit með þeim, 259:—g. sundr, to go asunder, part, and of a bargain, to be broken off, passim:—g. til, to step out, come along; gangit til, ok blótið, 623. 59; gangit til, ok hyggit at, landsmenn, Fms. iv. 282: to offer oneself, to volunteer, Bs. i. 23, 24: the phrase, e-m gengr e-ð til e-s, to purpose, intend; en þat gékk mér til þess ( that was my reason) at ek ann þér eigi, etc., Ísl. ii. 269; sagði, at honum gékk ekki ótrúnaðr til þessa, Fms. x. 39; gékk Flosa þat til, at …, Nj. 178; gengr mér meirr þat til, at ek vilda firra vini mína vandræðum, Fms. ii. 171; mælgi gengr mér til, ‘tis that I have spoken too freely, Orkn. 469, Fms. vi. 373, vii. 258: to fare, hversu hefir ykkr til gengið, how have you fared? Grett. 48 new Ed.; Loka gékk lítt til, it fared ill with L., Fb. i. 276: mod., þat gékk svá til, it so happened, but not freq., as bera við is better, (tilgangr, intention):—g. um e-t, to go about a thing; g. um sættir, to go between, as peacemaker, Fms. v. 156; g. um beina, to attend guests, Nj. 50, passim: to manage, fékk hón svá um gengit, Grett. 197 new Ed.; hversu þér genguð um mitt góðs, 206: to spread over, in the phrase, má þat er um margan gengr; þess er um margan gengr guma, Hm. 93: to veer, go round, of the wind, gékk um veðrit ok styrmdi at þeim, the wind went round and a gale met them, Bs. i. 775:—g. undan, to go before, escape, Ver. 15, Fms. vii. 217, Blas. 49: to be lost, wasted, jafnmikit sem undan gékk af hans vanrækt, Gþl. 338: to absent oneself, eggjuðusk ok báðu engan undan g., Fms. x. 238:—g. undir, to undertake a duty, freq.: to set, of the sun, Rb. 468, Vígl. (in a verse): to go into one’s possession, power, Fms. vii. 207;—g. upp, to be wasted, of money, Fær. 39, Fms. ix. 354: of stones or earth-bound things, to get loose, be torn loose, þeir glímdu svá at upp gengu stokkar allir í húsinu, Landn. 185; flest gékk upp þat sem fyrir þeim varð, Háv. 40, Finnb. 248; ok gékk ór garðinum upp ( was rent loose) garðtorfa frosin, Eb. 190: to rise, yield, when summoned, Sturl. iii. 236: of a storm, gale, to get up, rise, veðr gékk upp at eins, Grett. 94, Bárð. 169; gengr upp stormr hinn sami, Bs. ii. 50: of an ice-bound river, to swell, áin var ákafliga mikil, vóru höfuðísar at báðum-megin, en gengin upp ( swoln with ice) eptir miðju, Ld. 46, Fbr. 20 new Ed., Bjarn. 52; vötnin upp gengin, Fbr. 114; áin var gengin upp ok íll yfirferðar, Grett. 134:—g. við, in the phrase, g. við staf, to go with a staff, rest on it: with dat., g. við e-u, to avow (vide ganga í gegn above):—g. yfir, to spread, prevail, áðr Kristnin gengi yfir, Fms. x. 273; hétu á heiðin goð til þess at þau léti eigi Kristnina g. yfir landit, Bs. i. 23: the phrase, láta eitt g. yfir báða, to let one fate go over both, to stand by one another for weal and woe; hefi ek því heitið honum at eitt skyldi g. yfir okkr bæði, Nj. 193, 201, 204, Gullþ. 8: so in the saying, má þat er yfir margan gengr, a common evil is easier to bear, Fbr. 45 new Ed. (vide um above); muntu nú verða at segja slíkt sem yfir hefir gengið, all that has happened, Fms. xi. 240; þess gengr ekki yfir þá at þeir vili þeim lengr þjóna, they will no longer serve them, come what may, Orkn. 84: to overrun, tyrannize over, þeir vóru ójafnaðar menn ok ganga þar yfir alla menn, Fms. x. 198 (yfirgangr): to transgress, Hom. 109: to overcome, þótti öllum mönnum sem hann mundi yfir allt g., Fms. vii. 326: a naut. term, to dash over, as spray, áfall svá mikit at yfir gékk þegar skipit, Bs. i. 422; hence the metaph. phrase, g. yfir e-n, to be astonished; það gengr yfir mig, it goes above me, I am astonished.

C. Used singly, of various things:

1. of cattle, horses, to graze (haga-gangr); segja menn at svín hans gengi á Svínanesi, en sauðir á Hjarðarnesi, Landn. 124, Eg. 711; kálfrinn óx skjótt ok gékk í túni um sumarit, Eb. 320; Freyfaxi gengr í dalnum fram, Hrafn. 6; þar var vanr at g. hafr um túnit, Nj. 62; þar var til grass (görs) at g., Ld. 96, Grág. passim; gangandi gripr, cattle, beasts, Bjarn. 22; ganganda fé, id., Sturl. i. 83, Band. 2, Ísl. ii. 401.

2. of shoals of fish, to go up, in a river or the like (fiski-ganga, -gengd); vötn er netnæmir fiskar g. í, Grág. i. 149; til landauðnar horfði í Ísafirði áðr fiskr gékk upp á Kvíarmiði, Sturl. ii. 177; fiskr er genginn inn ór álum, Bb. 3. 52.

3. of the sun, stars, vide B. above, (sólar-gangr hæstr, lengstr, and lægstr skemstr = the longest and shortest day); áðr sól gangi af Þingvelli, Grág. i. 24; því at þar gékk eigi sól af um skamdegi, Landn. 140, Rb. passim:—of a thunder-storm, þar gékk reiði-duna með eldingu, Fb. iii. 174:—of the tide, stream, water, vide B. above, eða gangi at vötn eða skriður, K. Þ. K. 78.

4. of a ship, gékk þá skipit mikit, Eg. 390, Fms. vi. 249; létu svá g. suðr fyrir landit, Eg. 78; lét svá g. suðr allt þar til er hann sigldi í Englands-haf, Ó. H. 149; réru nótt ok dag sem g. mátti, Eg. 88; gékk skipit brátt út á haf, Ó. H. 136.

β. to pass; kvað engi skip skyldi g. (go, pass) til Íslands þat sumar, Ld. 18.

II. metaph. to run out, stretch out, project, of a landscape or the like; gengr haf fyrir vestan ok þar af firðir stórir, Eg. 57; g. höf stór ór útsjánum inn í jörðina; haf (the Mediterranean) gengr af Njörva-sundum (the Straits of Gibraltar), Hkr. i. 5; nes mikit gékk í sæ út, Eg. 129, Nj. 261; í gegnum Danmörk gengr sjór (the Baltic) í Austrveg, A. A. 288; fyrir austan hafs-botn þann (Bothnia) er gengr til móts við Gandvík (the White Sea), Orkn. begin.: frá Bjarmalandi g. lönd til úbygða, A. A. 289; Europa gengr allt til endimarka Hispaniae, Stj. 83; öllum megin gengr at henni haf ok kringir um hana, 85; þessi þinghá gékk upp ( extended) um Skriðudal, Hrafn. 24: of houses, af fjósi gékk forskáli, Dropl. 28.

2. to spread, branch out; en af því tungurnar eru ólíkar hvár annarri, þær þegar, er ór einni ok hinni sömu hafa gengit eða greinzt, þá þarf ólíka stafi í at hafa, Skálda (Thorodd) 160: of a narrative, gengr þessi saga mest af Sverri konungi, this story goes forth from him, i. e. relates to, tells of him, Fb. ii. 533; litlar sögur megu g. af hesti mínum, Nj. 90; um fram alla menn Norræna þá er sögur g. frá, Fms. i. 81.

III. to take the lead, prevail; gékk þaðan af í Englandi Valska, thereafter (i. e. after the Conquest) the Welsh tongue prevailed in England, Ísl. ii. 221; ok þar allt sem Dönsk tunga gengi, Fms. xi. 19; meðan Dönsk tunga gengr, x. 179:—of money, to be current, hundrað aura þá er þá gengu í gjöld, Dropl. 16; eigi skulu álnar g. aðrar en þessar, Grág. i. 498; í þenna tíð gékk hér silfr í allar stórskuldir, 500, Fms. viii. 270; eptir því sem gengr ( the course) flestra manna í millum, Gþl. 352:—of laws, to be valid, ok var nær sem sín lög gengi í hverju fylki, Fms. iv. 18; Óðinn setti lög í landi sínu þau er gengit höfðu fyrr með Ásum, Hkr. i. 13; þeirra laga er gengu á Uppsala-þingi, Ó. H. 86; hér hefir Kristindóms-bálk þann er g. skal, N. G. L. i. 339; sá siðr er þá gékk, Fb. i. 71, (vide ganga yfir):—of sickness, plague, famine, to rage, þá gékk landfarsótt, bóla, drepsótt, hallæri, freq.; also impers., gékk því hallæri um allt Ísland, Bs. i. 184; mikit hallæri ok hart gékk yfir fólkið, 486, v. l.; gékk sóttin um haustið fyrir sunnan land; þá gékk mest plágan fyrri, Ann. 1402, 1403.

IV. to go on, last, in a bad sense, of an evil; tókst síðan bardagi, ok er hann hafði gengit um hríð, Fs. 48: impers., hefir þessu gengit ( it has gone on) marga manns-aldra, Fms. i. 282; gékk því lengi, so it went on a long while, Grett. 79 new Ed.; gékk þessu enn til dags, Nj. 272; ok gékk því um hríð, 201; ok gékk því allan þann dag, Fms. vii. 147; lát því g. í allt sumar, xi. 57; gengr þessu þar til er …, Fb. i. 258.

V. denoting violence; létu g. bæði grjót ok vápn, Eg. 261; létu þá hvárir-tveggju g. allt þat er til vápna höfðu, Fms. ix. 44; láta höggin g., to let it rain blows, Úlf. 12. 40; háðung, spottyrði, hróp ok brigzl hver lét með öðrum g. á víxl, Pass. 14. 3, (vápna-gangr); Birkibeinar róa þá eptir, ok létu g. lúðrana, and sounded violently the alarum, Fms. ix. 50, (lúðra-gangr); láta dæluna g., to pour out bad language, vide dæla.

VI. to be able to go on, to go, partly impers.; ef þat gengr eigi, if that will not do, Fms. vi. 284; svá þykt at þeim gékk þar ekki at fara, they stood so close that they could not proceed there, Nj. 247; þá nam þar við, gékk þá eigi lengra, there was a stop; then it could go no farther, Fms. xi. 278; leiddu þeir skipit upp eptir ánni, svá sem gékk, as far as the ship could go, as far as the river was navigable, Eg. 127: esp. as a naut. term, impers., e. g. þeim gékk ekki fyrir nesið, they could not clear the ness; þá gengr eigi lengra, ok fella þeir þá seglið, Bs. i. 423; at vestr gengi um Langanes, 485, v. l.

VII. with adverbs; g. létt, fljótt, to go smoothly; g. þungt, seint, to go slowly; oss munu öll vápna-viðskipti þungt g. við þá, Nj. 201; þungt g. oss nú málaferlin, 181; gékk þeim lítt atsóknin, Stj. 385; at þeim feðgum hefði þá allir hlutir léttast gengit, Bs. i. 274; seint gengr, Þórir, greizlan, Ó. H. 149; g. betr, verr, to get the better, the worse; gékk Ribbungum betr í fyrstu, Fms. ix. 313; gengu ekki mjök kaupin, the bargain did not go well, Nj. 157, cp. ganga til (B. above):—to turn out, hversu g. mundi orrostan, 273; gékk þá allt eptir því sem Hallr hafði sagt, 256; ef kviðir g. í hag sækjanda, if the verdict goes for the plaintiff, Grág. i. 87; þótti þetta mál hafa gengit at óskum, Dropl. 14; mart gengr verr en varir, a saying, Hm. 39; þykir honum nú at sýnu g. ( it seems to him evident) at hann hafi rétt hugsað, Fms. xi. 437; g. andæris, to go all wrong, Am. 14; g. misgöngum, to go amiss, Grág. i. 435; g. e-m í tauma, to turn false ( crooked); þat mun mér lítt í tauma g. er Rútr segir, Nj. 20; g. ofgangi, to go too high, Fms. vii. 269.

VIII. of a blow or the like; hafði gengit upp á miðjan fetann, the axe went in up to the middle of the blade, Nj. 209; gékk þegar á hol, 60; gékk í gegnum skjöldinn, 245, Fb. i. 530.

IX. of law; láta próf g., to make an enquiry; láta vátta g., to take evidence, D. N.

X. to be gone, be lost; gékk hér með holdit niðr at beini, the flesh was torn off, Fb. i. 530: esp. in pass. part. genginn, dead, gone, eptir genginn guma, Hm. 71; moldar-genginn, buried, Sl. 60; hel-genginn, 68; afli genginn, gone from strength, i. e. powerless, Skv. 3. 13.

β. gone, past; gengið er nú það görðist fyr, a ditty; mér er gengið heimsins hjól, gone for me is the world’s wheel ( luck), a ditty.

XI. used as transit. with acc.; hann gengr björninn á bak aptr, he broke the bear’s back in grappling with him, Finnb. 248; ok gengr hana á bak, ok brýtr í sundr í henni hrygginn, Fb. i. 530.

2. medic. with dat. to discharge; ganga blóði, to discharge blood (Dan. blodgang), Bs. i. 337, 383; Arius varð bráðdauðr ok gékk ór sér öllum iðrum, Ver. 47.

D. REFLEX.:

I. singly, gangask, to be altered, to change, be corrupted; gangask í munni, of tradition; var þat löng ævi, ok vant at sögurnar hefði eigi gengisk í munni, Ó. H. pref.; má því eigi þetta mál í munni gengisk hafa, Fb. ii. Sverr. S. pref.; ok mættim vér ráða um nokkut, at málit gengisk, that the case could miscarry, be lost, Glúm. 380:—láta gangask, to let pass. waive; lét Páll þá g. þá hluti er áðr höfðu í millum staðit, Sturl. i. 102; ef þú lætr eigi g. þat er ek kref þik, Fms. xi. 61.

2. e-m gengsk hugr við e-t, to change one’s mind, i. e. to be moved to compassion, yield; sótti hón þá svá at honum gékksk hugr við, Eb. 264; þá gékksk Þorgerði hugr við harma-tölur hans, Ld. 232; ok mun honum g. hugr við þat, svá at hann mun fyrirgefa þér, Gísl. 98; nú sem hann grét, gékksk Ísak hugr við, Stj. 167; er sendimaðr fann at Birni gékksk hugr við féit, Ó. H. 194; við slíkar fortölur hennar gékksk Einari hugr (E. was swayed) til ágirni, Orkn. 24.

II. with prepp. (cp. B. above); gangask at, to ‘go at it,’ engage in a fight; nú gangask þeir at fast, Dropl. 24, Ísl. ii. 267; gengusk menn at sveitum, of wrestlers, they wrestled one with another in sections (Dan. flokkevis), Glúm. 354; þeir gengusk at lengi, Finnb. 248:—gangask fyrir, vide B. above:—gangask í gegn, at móti, to stand against, fight against; at vér látim ok eigi þá ráða er mest vilja í gegn gangask (i. e. the extreme on each side), Íb. 12, cp. Fms. ii. 241; at þeir skipaði til um fylkingar sínar, hverjar sveitir móti skyldi g., i. e. to pair the combatants off, ix. 489; þeir risu upp ok gengusk at móti, Stj. 497. 2 Sam. ii. 15:—g. nær, to come to close quarters (Lat. cominus gerere), Nj. 176, Fms. xi. 240:—gangask á, to dash against one another, to split; á gengusk eiðar, the oaths were broken, Vsp. 30: to be squared off against one another, sú var görð þeirra, at á gengusk vígin húskarlanna, Rd. 288; ekki er annars getið en þeir léti þetta á gangask, i. e. they let it drop, Bjarn. 47; gangask fyrir, to fall off, Fms. iii. 255:—gangask við, to grow, gain strength; áðr en við gengisk hans bæn, before his prayer should be fulfilled, x. 258; ef þat er ætlað at trúa þessi skuli við g., Nj. 162; hétu þeir fast á guðin, at þau skyldi eigi láta við garrgask Kristniboð Ólafs konungs, Fms. ii. 32; þetta gékksk við um öll þau fylki, vii. 300; mikit gékksk Haraldr við (H. grew fast) um vöxt ok afl, Fb. i. 566; Eyvindr hafði mikið við gengizk um menntir, E. had much improved himself in good breeding, Hrafn. 24; vildi hann prófa hvárr þeirra meira hafði við gengisk, which of them had gained most strength, Grett. 107: to be in vogue, in a bad sense, ok löngum við gengisk öfund ok rangindi, Fms. i. 221, cp. Pass. 37. 7:—gangask ór stað, to be removed, Fms. xi. 107.

III. in the phrase, e-m gengsk vel, ílla, it goes well, ill with one, Hom. 168, Am. 53; ílls gengsk þér aldri, nema …, the evil will never leave thee, thou wilt never be happy, unless …, 65.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > GANGA

97 equipo

m.

1 team (people).

trabajar en equipo to work as a team

equipo de rescate rescue team

equipo de salvamento rescue team

2 team (jugadores).

un equipo de rugby a rugby team

equipo local/visitante local/visiting team

3 equipment (equipamiento).

equipo de oficina office equipment

4 trousseau.

5 system.

equipo de alta fidelidad hi-fi system

equipo de sonido sound system

6 kit.

7 gear.

pres.indicat.

1^st person singular (yo) present indicative of spanish verb: equipar.

* * *

equipo

► nombre masculino

1 (prestaciones) equipment

2 (ropas, utensilios) outfit, kit

3 (de personas) team

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

equipo de alta fidelidad hi-fi system

equipo de fútbol football team

equipo de música music centre, stereo system

equipo de novia trousseau

equipo de salvamento rescue team

gastos de equipo capital expenditure sing

* * *

noun m.

1) crew

2) team

3) gear, equipment

4) kit

* * *

SM

1) (Dep) team

equipo de casa — home team

equipo de fuera — away team

equipo de fútbol — football team

equipo de relevos — relay team

equipo local — home team

equipo titular — A team, first team

equipo visitante — visiting team

2) [de personas] team

trabajar en equipo — to work as a team

equipo cinematográfico móvil — mobile film unit

equipo de cámara — camera crew

equipo de desactivación de explosivos — bomb-disposal unit

equipo de gobierno — government team

equipo de rescate, equipo de salvamento, equipo de socorro — [civil] rescue team; [militar] rescue squad, rescue unit

equipo directivo — management team

equipo médico — medical team, medical unit

3) (=utensilios, accesorios) [gen] equipment; [para deportes] equipment, kit

me robaron todo el equipo de esquí — they stole all my skiing equipment o gear *

- caerse con todo el equipo

equipo de alpinismo — climbing gear

equipo de alta fidelidad — hi-fi system

equipo de caza — hunting gear

equipo de fumador — smoker's outfit, smoker's accessories

equipo de música — stereo system

equipo de novia — trousseau

equipo de oficina — office furniture

equipo de primeros auxilios — first-aid kit

equipo de reparaciones — repair kit

equipo físico — (Inform) hardware

equipo industrial — plant

equipo lógico — (Inform) software

equipo rodante — (Ferro) rolling stock

* * *

masculino

1) (de trabajadores, jugadores) team

el equipo local or de casa — the home team

el equipo de fuera or visitante — the away o visiting team

un equipo de salvamento — a rescue team

trabajo en equipo — team work

trabajar en equipo — to work as a team

el equipo directivo — the management team

hacer equipo con alguien — (AmL) to team up with somebody

ser del otro equipo — (AmL fam & pey) to be one of them (colloq & pej)

- equipo móvil

2) (de materiales, utensilios) equipment

equipo de pesca — fishing tackle

equipo de fotografía — photographic equipment

equipo de gimnasia — gym kit

caerse con todo el equipo — (fam) to mess things up (colloq), to screw up (AmE sl)

•

- equipo de alta fidelidad

- equipo de música or de sonido or modular

- equipo de serie

* * *

= apparatus, equipment, team, crew, gear, rig, infrastructure, squad.

Ex. The abstracts of research papers will typically represent the methodology employed, in particular, apparatus, equipment, tools, materials.

Ex. A post-coordinate index depends upon specialised equipment and storage devices.

Ex. Guidelines are also valuable introductory material for any new abstractors, whether geographically separated from the remainder of the abstracting team or not.

Ex. Phillips has 12 installations with a crew of 15-450 men.

Ex. The library is now the greatest treasure house of whaling fact and lore in the world with its collection of logbooks, maps, photographs, manuscripts and whaling gear = Ahora la biblioteca ahora es la mayor fuente inagotable del mundo de datos y tradiciones sobre la caza de ballenas con su colección de diarios de navegación, mapas, fotografías, manuscritos y herramientas para la caza de ballenas.

Ex. An adjustable seating rig was used to create the three-dimensional shape of a static lounge chair.

Ex. Priority sectors are in energy, industry and infrastructure.

Ex. This concept comes mainly from the military, where a designated number of troops make a squad, a platoon, a regiment, etc..

----

* basado en el trabajo en equipo = team-based.

* biblioteconomía en equipo = team librarianship.

* colaboración en equipo = collaborative teamwork.

* compañero de equipo = teammate.

* de aplicación específica a un equipo de ordenador = hardware-based.

* dejar fuera del equipo = sideline.

* deporte de equipo = team sport.

* equipo administrativo = administrative team.

* equipo audiovisual = audiovisual equipment.

* equipo de atletismo = athletic team.

* equipo de búsqueda y rescate = search and rescue team.

* equipo de casa = home team.

* equipo de casa, el = home side, the.

* equipo de dirección = management, management team, administrative team.

* equipo de gestión = management team.

* equipo de gobierno = administration, governing board, management.

* equipo de impresión = press crew.

* equipo de investigación = research team.

* equipo de lectura de microfilm = microfilm reading equipment.

* equipo de mantenimiento = maintenance crew.

* equipo de mantenimiento artificial de la vida = life-support system.

* equipo de medición topográfica = surveying equipment.

* equipo de música = home stereo system, stereo system.

* equipo de pesca = fishing tackle, fishing gear, fishing equipment, angling equipment.

* equipo deportivo = sports team.

* equipo de producción = production team, production equipment.

* equipo de protección = protective gear.

* equipo de rescate = rescue team.

* equipo de salvamento = rescue team.

* equipo de sonido = sound system, hi-fi system.

* equipo de trabajo = study team, project team, work team.

* equipo editorial = editorial team.

* equipo especial = skunkwork [skunk work].

* equipo informático = computer hardware, computer equipment, computer machinery.

* equipo interdisciplinar = cross-functional team.

* equipo investigador = research team.

* equipo mixto = cross-functional team.

* equipo nacional = national team.

* equipo para escuchar visitas grabadas = audio tour unit.

* equipo protector = protective gear.

* equipos ADP (para el proceso automático de datos) = ADP (automatic data processing) equipment.

* equipos de calefacción = heating equipment.

* equipos de reprografía = reprographic equipment.

* equipo solar = solar equipment.

* equipo titular = starting team.

* equipo topográfico = surveying equipment.

* equipo visitante = visiting team.

* esfuerzo de equipo = team effort.

* espíritu de equipo = team spirit.

* fomento de espíritu de equipo = team building.

* investigación en equipo = team research.

* material y equipos de oficina = office supply and equipment.

* partido entre equipos rivales = local derby.

* suministrar material de equipo = supply + equipment.

* trabajar en equipo = work as + a team.

* trabajo en equipo = teamwork, collaborative teamwork, team management.

* un equipo de = a team of.

* * *

masculino

1) (de trabajadores, jugadores) team

el equipo local or de casa — the home team

el equipo de fuera or visitante — the away o visiting team

un equipo de salvamento — a rescue team

trabajo en equipo — team work

trabajar en equipo — to work as a team

el equipo directivo — the management team

hacer equipo con alguien — (AmL) to team up with somebody

ser del otro equipo — (AmL fam & pey) to be one of them (colloq & pej)

- equipo móvil

2) (de materiales, utensilios) equipment

equipo de pesca — fishing tackle

equipo de fotografía — photographic equipment

equipo de gimnasia — gym kit

caerse con todo el equipo — (fam) to mess things up (colloq), to screw up (AmE sl)

•

- equipo de alta fidelidad

- equipo de música or de sonido or modular

- equipo de serie

* * *

= apparatus, equipment, team, crew, gear, rig, infrastructure, squad.

Ex: The abstracts of research papers will typically represent the methodology employed, in particular, apparatus, equipment, tools, materials.

Ex: A post-coordinate index depends upon specialised equipment and storage devices.

Ex: Guidelines are also valuable introductory material for any new abstractors, whether geographically separated from the remainder of the abstracting team or not.

Ex: Phillips has 12 installations with a crew of 15-450 men.

Ex: The library is now the greatest treasure house of whaling fact and lore in the world with its collection of logbooks, maps, photographs, manuscripts and whaling gear = Ahora la biblioteca ahora es la mayor fuente inagotable del mundo de datos y tradiciones sobre la caza de ballenas con su colección de diarios de navegación, mapas, fotografías, manuscritos y herramientas para la caza de ballenas.

Ex: An adjustable seating rig was used to create the three-dimensional shape of a static lounge chair.

Ex: Priority sectors are in energy, industry and infrastructure.

Ex: This concept comes mainly from the military, where a designated number of troops make a squad, a platoon, a regiment, etc..

* basado en el trabajo en equipo = team-based.

* biblioteconomía en equipo = team librarianship.

* colaboración en equipo = collaborative teamwork.

* compañero de equipo = teammate.

* de aplicación específica a un equipo de ordenador = hardware-based.

* dejar fuera del equipo = sideline.

* deporte de equipo = team sport.

* equipo administrativo = administrative team.

* equipo audiovisual = audiovisual equipment.

* equipo de atletismo = athletic team.

* equipo de búsqueda y rescate = search and rescue team.

* equipo de casa = home team.

* equipo de casa, el = home side, the.

* equipo de dirección = management, management team, administrative team.

* equipo de gestión = management team.

* equipo de gobierno = administration, governing board, management.

* equipo de impresión = press crew.

* equipo de investigación = research team.

* equipo de lectura de microfilm = microfilm reading equipment.

* equipo de mantenimiento = maintenance crew.

* equipo de mantenimiento artificial de la vida = life-support system.

* equipo de medición topográfica = surveying equipment.

* equipo de música = home stereo system, stereo system.

* equipo de pesca = fishing tackle, fishing gear, fishing equipment, angling equipment.

* equipo deportivo = sports team.

* equipo de producción = production team, production equipment.

* equipo de protección = protective gear.

* equipo de rescate = rescue team.

* equipo de salvamento = rescue team.

* equipo de sonido = sound system, hi-fi system.

* equipo de trabajo = study team, project team, work team.

* equipo editorial = editorial team.

* equipo especial = skunkwork [skunk work].

* equipo informático = computer hardware, computer equipment, computer machinery.

* equipo interdisciplinar = cross-functional team.

* equipo investigador = research team.

* equipo mixto = cross-functional team.

* equipo nacional = national team.

* equipo para escuchar visitas grabadas = audio tour unit.

* equipo protector = protective gear.

* equipos ADP (para el proceso automático de datos) = ADP (automatic data processing) equipment.

* equipos de calefacción = heating equipment.

* equipos de reprografía = reprographic equipment.

* equipo solar = solar equipment.

* equipo titular = starting team.

* equipo topográfico = surveying equipment.

* equipo visitante = visiting team.

* esfuerzo de equipo = team effort.

* espíritu de equipo = team spirit.

* fomento de espíritu de equipo = team building.

* investigación en equipo = team research.

* material y equipos de oficina = office supply and equipment.

* partido entre equipos rivales = local derby.

* suministrar material de equipo = supply + equipment.

* trabajar en equipo = work as + a team.

* trabajo en equipo = teamwork, collaborative teamwork, team management.

* un equipo de = a team of.

* * *

equipo

masculine

A ( Dep) team; (de trabajadores, colaboradores) team

un equipo de baloncesto/fútbol a basketball/football team

el equipo local or de casa the home team

el equipo de fuera or visitante the away o visiting team

un equipo de salvamento a rescue team

el equipo de desactivación de explosivos the bomb disposal team o squad

trabajo en equipo team work

trabajamos en equipo we work as a team

el equipo directivo de la empresa the company's management team

hacer equipo con algn ( AmL); to team up with sb

ser del otro equipo ( AmL fam pey); to be one of them ( colloq pej)

Compuestos:

● equipo de investigadores

research team

● equipo de redacción

editorial staff o team

● equipo de rescate

rescue team

● equipo de televisión

television crew

● equipo de trabajo

working group, task force

● equipo médico

medical team

● equipo móvil

outside broadcasting unit

● equipo operativo

task force

B (de materiales, utensilios) equipment

se compró el equipo completo de esquí he bought himself all the necessary equipment o ( colloq) all the gear for skiing

equipos informáticos computer hardware, hardware

equipo de pesca fishing tackle

equipo de fotografía photographic equipment

equipo de gimnasia gym kit

caerse con todo el equipo ( fam); to mess things up ( colloq), to screw up ( AmE sl)

Compuestos:

● equipo de alta fidelidad

hi-fi system

● equipo MP3

MP3 player

● equipo de música

sound system

● equipo de serie

standard fittings (pl)

● equipo de sonido

sound system

● equipo modular

( Chi) sound system

* * *

Del verbo equipar: ( conjugate equipar)

equipo es:

1ª persona singular (yo) presente indicativo

equipó es:

3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) pretérito indicativo

Multiple Entries:
equipar
equipo
equipar ( conjugate equipar) verbo transitivo
a) ‹ persona› to equip, fit … out;

equipo a algn con or de algo to equip sb with sth
b) ‹ casa› to furnish;

‹local/barco› to fit out;
( de víveres) to provision;
◊ una cocina bien equipada a well-equipped kitchen

equipo sustantivo masculino
1 (de trabajadores, jugadores) team;
◊ el equipo local/visitante the home/visiting team;

trabajo de equipo team work;
trabajar en equipo to work as a team;
equipo de filmación film crew
2 (de materiales, utensilios) equipment;
◊ equipo de pesca fishing tackle;

equipo de gimnasia gym kit;
equipo de alta fidelidad hi-fi system
equipar verbo transitivo to equip [con, with]
equipo sustantivo masculino
1 (grupo de profesionales) team: juega en un equipo de baloncesto, he plays in a basketball team
tenemos que trabajar en equipo, we've got to work as a team
2 (conjunto de aparatos) equipment: equipo de música, music system
3 (conjunto de ropa, elementos, etc) outfit: me gustaría tener un equipo de bucear, I'd like to have a set of diving equipment
' equipo' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
alineación
- bajón
- batir
- combatividad
- compacta
- compacto
- compenetrarse
- componente
- concentración
- confraternizar
- cuadrilla
- efectividad
- enfrentarse
- entrenar
- estruendo
- fuera
- inferioridad
- interdisciplinaria
- interdisciplinario
- líder
- mofarse
- óptima
- óptimo
- parafernalia
- savia
- servidumbre
- socorro
- sonido
- teutón
- teutona
- teutónica
- teutónico
- vencedor
- vencedora
- visitante
- alentar
- alinear
- animador
- arrasar
- ascenso
- baja
- bajar
- barrer
- cabeza
- compañero
- componer
- contrario
- delantera
- derrotado
- derrotar
English:
apparatus
- audio
- boom box
- crew
- cut out
- deck
- defeat
- do-it-yourself
- electrical equipment
- equipment
- field
- forfeit
- gear
- goalkeeper
- goose
- hi-fi
- integral
- kit
- letdown
- lick
- opposing
- outfit
- part-payment
- place
- preclude
- promote
- pull out
- retrofit
- row
- scapegoat
- side
- spirit
- squad
- standard
- stretcher party
- surgical
- tackle
- team
- team-game
- team-mate
- teamwork
- unbeatable
- unit
- up-to-date
- visiting team
- winning
- ahead
- behalf
- color
- drop

* * *

equipo nm

1. [de trabajadores, profesionales, voluntarios] team;

un equipo de extinción de incendios a fire-fighting team;

trabajar en equipo to work as a team;

trabajo en equipo teamwork

Comp
equipo de rescate rescue team;
equipo de salvamento rescue team

2. [de jugadores, atletas] team;

un equipo de rugby a rugby team;

deportes de equipo team sports

Comp
equipo local local team;
equipo visitante visiting team

3. [equipamiento] equipment;

un equipo de submarinismo scuba diving equipment;

ya tiene listo el equipo de esquí he has got his skiing gear ready now;

Comp
Fam
caerse o [m5] estrellarse con todo el equipo to get it in the neck

Comp
equipo de oficina office equipment;
equipo de primeros auxilios first-aid kit;

equipo quirúrgico surgical instruments

4. [indumentaria] [de novia] trousseau;
[de soldado] kit; [de colegial] uniform; [de deportista] strip
Comp
Arg equipo buzo tracksuit
5. [de música] system

Comp
equipo de alta fidelidad hi-fi system;
equipo de música music o sound system;

equipo de sonido sound system

* * *

equipo

m

1 DEP team

2

:

equipo investigador investigating team

3 accesorios equipment;

equipo de esquiar skiing equipment;

caerse con todo el equipo fig fam fall flat

* * *

equipo nm

1) : team, crew

2) : gear, equipment

* * *

equipo n

1. (personas, jugadores) team

un equipo de baloncesto a basketball team

2. (ropa, utensilios) gear / kit

un equipo de esquí skiing gear

¿has traído tu equipo de tenis? have you brought your tennis gear?

3. (equipamiento) equipment

equipo de música hi fi / stereo

Spanish-English dictionary > equipo

98 अग्निः _agniḥ

अग्निः [अङ्गति ऊर्ध्वं गच्छति अङ्ग्-नि,नलोपश्च Uṇ.4.5., or fr. अञ्च् 'to go.']

1 Fire कोप˚, चिन्ता˚, शोक˚, ज्ञान˚, राज˚, &c.

-2 The God of fire.

-3 Sacrificial fire of three kinds (गार्हपत्य, आहवनीय and दक्षिण); पिता बै गार्हपत्यो$ ग्निर्माताग्निर्दक्षिणः स्मृतः । गुरुराहवनीयस्तु साग्नित्रेता गरीयसी ॥ Ms. 2.232.

-4 The fire of the stomach, digestive faculty, gastric fluid.

-5 Bile (नाभेरूर्ध्व हृदयादधस्तादामाशयमाचक्षते तद्गतं सौरं तेजः पित्तम् इत्याचक्षते).

-6 Cauterization (अग्नि- कर्मन्).

-7 Gold.

-8 The number three. शराग्निपरिमाणम् (पञ्चत्रिंशत्) Mb.13.17.26.

-9 N. of various plants: (a) चित्रक Plumbago Zeylanica; (b) रक्तचित्रक; (c) भल्लातक Semicarpus Anacardium; (d) निम्बक Citrus Acida.

-1 A mystical substitute for the letter र्. In Dvandva comp. as first member with names of deities, and with particular words अग्नि is changed to अग्ना, as ˚विष्णू, ˚मरुतौ, or to अग्नी, ˚पर्जन्यौ, ˚ वरुणौ, ˚षोमौ

-11 पिङगला नाडी; यत्र तद् ब्रह्म निर्द्वन्द्वं यत्र सोमः, (इडा) सहाग्निना (अग्निः पिङ्गला) Mb.14.2.1.

-12 Sacrificial altar, अग्निकुण्ड cf. Rām. 1.14.28.

-13 Sky. अग्निर्मूर्धा Muṇḍ 2.1.4. [cf. L. ignis.

[Agni is the God of Fire, the Ignis of the Latins and Ogni of the Slavonians. He is one of the most prominent deities of the Ṛigveda. He, as an immortal, has taken up his abode among mortals as their guest; he is the domestic priest, the successful accomplisher and protector of all ceremonies; he is also the religious leader and preceptor of the gods, a swift messenger employed to announce to the immortals the hymns and to convey to them the oblations of their worshippers, and to bring them down from the sky to the place of sacrifice. He is sometimes regarded as the mouth and the tongue through which both gods and men participate in the sacrifices. He is the lord, protector and leader of people, monarch of men, the lord of the house, friendly to mankind, and like a father, mother, brother &c. He is represented as being produced by the attrition of two pieces of fuel which are regarded as husband and wife. Sometimes he is considered to have been brought down from heaven or generated by Indra between two clouds or stones, created by Dyau, or fashioned by the gods collectively. In some passages he is represented as having a triple existence, which may mean his three- fold manifestations as the sun in heaven, lightning in the atmosphere, and as ordinary fire on the earth, although the three appearances are also elsewhere otherwise explained. His epithets are numberless and for the most part descriptive of his physical characteristics: धूमकेतु, हुतभुज्, शुचि, रोहिताश्व, सप्तजिह्व, तोमरधर, घृतान्न, चित्रभानु, ऊर्ध्वशोचिस्, शोचिष्केश, हरिकेश, हिरण्यदन्त, अयोदंष्ट्र &c. In a celebrated passage he is said to have 4 horns, 3 feet, 2 heads, and 7 hands. The highest divine functions are ascribed to Agni. He is said to have spread out the two worlds and + produced them, to have supported heaven, formed the mundane regions and luminaries of heaven, to have begotten Mitra and caused the sun to ascend the sky. He is the head and summit of the sky, the centre of the earth. Earth, Heaven and all beings obey his commands. He knows and sees all worlds or creatures and witnesses all their actions. The worshippers of Agni prosper, they are wealthy and live long. He is the protector of that man who takes care to bring him fuel. He gives him riches and no one can overcome him who sacrifices to this god. He confers, and is the guardian of, immortality. He is like a water-trough in a desert and all blessing issue from him. He is therefore constantly supplicated for all kinds of boons, riches, food, deliverance from enemies and demons, poverty, reproach, childlessness, hunger &c. Agni is also associated with Indra in different hymns and the two gods are said to be twin brothers.

Such is the Vedic conception of Agni; but in the course of mythological personifications he appears as the eldest son of Brahmā and is called Abhimānī [Viṣṇu Purāṇa]. His wife was Svāhā; by her, he had 3 sons - Pāvaka, Pavamāna and Śuchi; and these had forty-five sons; altogether 49 persons who are considered identical with the 49 fires. He is also represented as a son of Aṅgiras, as a king of the Pitṛs or Manes, as a Marut and as a grandson of Śāṇḍila, and also as a star. The Harivaṁśa describes him as clothed in black, having smoke for his standard and head-piece and carrying a flaming javelin. He is borne in a chariot drawn by red horses and the 7 winds are the wheels of his car. He is accompanied by a ram and sometimes he is represented as riding on that animal. Agni was appointed by Brahamā as the sovereign of the quarter between the south and east, whence the direction is still known as Āgneyī. The Mahābhārata represents Agni as having exhausted his vigour and become dull by devouring many oblations at the several sacrifices made by king Śvetaki, but he recruited his strength by devouring the whole Khāṇḍava forest; for the story see the word खाण्डव].

-Comp. -अ (आ) गारम् -रः, -आलयः, -गृहम् [अग्निकार्याय अगारम् शाक˚ त.] a fire- sanctuary, house or place for keeping the sacred fire; वसंश्चतुर्थो$ग्निरिवाग्न्यगारे R.5.25. रथाग्न्यगारं चापार्चीं शरशक्तिगदे- न्धनम् Mb.11.25.14.

-अस्त्रम् fire-missile, a rocket,

-आत्मक a. [अग्निरात्मा यस्य] of the nature of fire सोमा- त्मिका स्त्री, ˚कः पुमान्.

-आधानम् consecrating the fire; so ˚आहिति.

-आधेयः [अग्निराधेयो येन] a Brāhmana who maintains the sacred fire. (

-यम्) =

˚आधानम्. -आहितः [अग्निराहितो येन, वा परनिपातः P.II.2.37.] one who maintains the sacred fire; See आहिताग्नि.

-इध् m. (अग्नीध्रः) [अग्निम् इन्द्धे स अग्नीध्] the priest who kindles fire (mostly Ved).

-इन्धनः [अग्निरिध्यते अनेन] N. of a Mantra. (नम्) kindling the fire; अग्नीन्धनं भैक्षचर्याम् Ms.2.18.

-उत्पातः [अग्निना दिव्यानलेन कृतः उत्पातः] a fiery portent, meteor, comet &c. In Bṛ. S.33 it is said to be of five kinds: दिवि भुक्तशुभफलानां पततां रूपाणि यानि तान्युल्काः । धिष्ण्योल्का- शनिविद्युत्तारा इति पञ्चधा भिन्नाः ॥ उल्का पक्षेण फलं तद्वत् धिष्ण्याशनिस्त्रिभिः पक्षैः । विद्युदहोभिः ष़ड्भिस्तद्वत्तारा विपाचयति ॥ Different fruits are said to result from the appearances of these portents, according to the nature of their colour, position &c.

-उद्धरणम्, -उद्धारः 1 producing fire by the friction of two araṇis.

-2 taking out, before sun-rise, the sacred fire from its cover of ashes previous to a sacrifice.

-उपस्थानम् worship of Agni; the Mantra or hymn with which Agni is worshipped (अग्निरुपस्थीयते$नेन) अग्निस्त्रिष्टुभ् उपस्थाने विनियोगः Sandhyā.

-एधः [अग्निमेधयति] an incendiary.

-कणः; -स्तोकः a spark.

-कर्मन् n. [अग्नौ कर्म स. त.]

1 cauterization.

-2 action of fire.

-3 oblation to Agni, worship of Agni (अग्निहोत्र); so ˚कार्य offering oblations to fire, feeding fire with ghee &c.; निर्वर्तिताग्निकार्यः K.16.; ˚र्यार्धदग्ध 39, Ms.3.69, अग्निकार्यं ततः कुर्यात्सन्ध्ययोरुभयोरपि । Y.1.25.

-कला a part (or appearance) of fire; ten varieties are mentioned धूम्रार्चिरुष्मा ज्वलिनी ज्वालिनी विस्फु- लिङ्गिनी । सुश्री: सुरूपा कपिला हव्यकव्यवहे अपि ॥ यादीनां दश- वर्णानां कला धर्मप्रदा अमूः ।).

-कारिका [अग्निं करोति आधत्ते करणे कर्तृत्वोपचारात् कर्तरि ण्वुल्]

1 the means of consecrating the sacred fire, the Ṛik called अग्नीध्र which begins with अग्निं दूतं पुरो दधे. 2. = अग्निकार्यम्.

-काष्ठम् अग्नेः उद्दीपनं काष्ठं शाक ˚त.] agallochum (अगुरु)

-कुक्कुटः [अग्नेः कुक्कुट इव रक्तवर्णस्फुलिङ्गत्वात्] a firebrand, lighted wisp of straw.

-कुण्डम [अग्नेराधानार्थं कुण्डम्] an enclosed space for keeping the fire, a fire-vessel.

-कुमारः, -तनयः; सुतः 1 N. of Kārttikeya said to be born from fire; Rām.7. See कार्त्तिकेय.

-2 a kind of preparation of medicinal drugs.

-कृतः Cashew-nut; the plant Anacardium occidentale. [Mar.काजू]

-केतुः [अग्नेः केतुरिव]

1 smoke.

-2 N. of two Rākṣasas on the side of Rāvaṇa and killed by Rāma.

-कोणः -दिक् the south-east corner ruled over by Agni; इन्द्रो वह्निः पितृपतिर्नौर्ऋतो वरुणो मरुत् । कुबेर ईशः पतयः पूर्वादीनां दिशां क्रमात् ॥

-क्रिया [अग्निना निर्वर्तिता क्रिया, शाक. त.]

1 obsequies, funeral ceremonies.

-2 branding; भेषजाग्निक्रियासु च Y.3.284.

-क्रीडा [तृ. त.] fire-works, illuminations.

-गर्भ a. [अग्निर्गर्भे यस्य] pregnant with or containing fire, having fire in the interior; ˚र्भां शमीमिव Ś 4.3. (

--र्भः) [अग्निरिव जारको गर्भो यस्य]

1 N. of the plant Agnijāra.

-2 the sun stone, name of a crystal supposed to contain and give out fire when touched by the rays of the sun; cf Ś2.7.

-3 the sacrificial stick अरणि which when churned, gives out fire.

(-र्भा) 1 N. of the Śamī plant as containing fire (the story of how Agni was discovered to exist in the interior of the Śamī plant is told in chap. 35 of अनु- शासनपर्व in Mb.)

-2 N. of the earth (अग्नेः सकाशात् गर्भो यस्यां सा; when the Ganges threw the semen of Śiva out on the Meru mountain, whatever on earth &c. was irradiated by its lustre, became gold and the earth was thence called वसुमती)

-3 N. of the plant महा- ज्योतिष्मती लता (अग्निरिव गर्भो मध्यभागो यस्याः सा) [Mar. माल- कांगोणी]

-ग्रन्थः [अग्निप्रतिपादको ग्रन्थः शाक. त.] the work that treats of the worship of Agni &c.

-घृतम् [अग्न्युद्दीपनं घृतं शाक. त.] a kind of medicinal preparation of ghee used to stimulate the digestive power.

-चित् m. अग्निं चितवान्; चि-भूतार्थे क्विप् P.III.2.91] one who has kept the sacred fire; यतिभिः सार्धमनग्निमग्निचित् R.8.25; अध्वरे- ष्वग्निचित्वत्सु Bk.5.11.

-चयः, -चयनम्, -चित्या. arranging or keeping the sacred fire (अग्न्याधान); चित्याग्निचित्ये च P.III.1.132.

-2 (

-यः, -यनः) the Mantra used in this operation.

-3 a heap of fire

-चित्वत् [अग्निचयनम् अस्त्यस्मिन् मतुप्; मस्य वः । तान्तत्वान्न पद- त्वम् Tv.] having अग्निचयन or अग्निचित्.

-चूडः A bird having a red tuft.

-चर्णम् gunpowder. कार्यासमर्थः कत्यस्ति शस्त्रगोलाग्निचूर्णयुक् Śukranīti 2.93.

-ज, -जात a. produced by or from fire, born from fire.

(-जः, -जातः) 1 N. of the plant अग्निजार (अग्नये अग्न्युद्दीपनाय जायते सेवनात् प्रभवति).

1 N. of Kārttikeya पराभिनत्क्रौञ्चमिवाद्रिमग्निजः Mb.8.9. 68.3. Viṣṇu. (

-जम्, -जातम) gold; so ˚जन्मन्.

-जित् m. God; Bhāg.8.14.4.

-जिह्व a.

1 having a fiery tongue.

-2 one having fire for the tongue, epithet of a God or of Visṇu in the boar incarnation. (

-ह्वा)

1 a tongue or flame of fire.

-2 one of the 7 tongues of Agni (कराली धूमिनी श्वेता लोहिता नीललोहिता । सुवर्णा पद्मरागा च जिह्वा: सप्त विभावसोः

-3 N. of a plant लाङ्गली (अग्नेर्जिह्वेव शिखा यस्याः सा); of another plant (जलपिप्पली) or गजपिप्पली (विषलाङ्गला) (Mar. जल-गज पिंपळी)

-ज्वाला 1 the flame or glow of fire.

-2 [अग्नेर्ज्वालेव शिखा यस्याः सा] N. of a plant with red blossoms, chiefly used by dyers, Grislea Tomentosa (Mar. धायफूल, धायटी).

-तप् a. [अग्निना तप्यते; तप्-क्विप्] having the warmth of fire; practising austerities by means of fire.

-तपस् a. [अग्निभिः तप्यते]

1 practising very aus- tere penance, standing in the midst of the five fires.

-2 glowing, shining or burning like fire (तपतीति तपाः अग्निरिव तपाः) hot as fire

-तेजस् a. having the lustre or power of fire. (अग्नेरिव तेजो यस्य). (

-स् n.) the lustre of fire. (

-स् m.) N. of one of the 7 Ṛiṣis of the 11th Manvantara.

-त्रयम् the three fires, See under अग्नि.

-द a. [अग्निं दाहार्थं गृहादौ ददाति; दा. -क.]

1 giving or supplying with fire

-2 tonic, stomachic, producing appetite, stimulating digestion.

-3 incendiary; अग्निदान् भक्तदांश्चैव Ms.9.278; अग्निदानां च ये लोकाः Y.2.74; so ˚दायक, ˚दायिन्. यदग्निदायके पापं यत्पापं गुरुतल्पगे. Rām.2.75.45.

-दग्ध a.

1 burnt on the funeral pile; अग्निदग्धाश्च ये जीवा ये$प्यदग्धाः कुले मम Vāyu. P.

-2 burnt with fire.

-3 burnt at once without having fire put into the mouth, being destitute of issue (?); (pl.) a class of Manes or Pitṛis who, when alive, kept up the household flame and presented oblations to fire.

-दमनी [अग्निर्दम्यते$नया; दम्-णिच् करणे ल्युट] a narcotic plant, Solanum Jacquini. [Mar. रिंगणी]

-दातृ [अग्निं विधानेन ददाति] one who performs the last (funeral) ceremonies of a man; यश्चाग्निदाता प्रेतस्य पिण्डं दद्यात्स एव हि.

-दीपन a. [अग्निं दीपयति] stimulating digestion, stomachic, tonic.

-दीप्त a. [तृ. त्त.] glowing, set on fire, blazing (

-प्ता) [अग्निर्जठरानलो दीप्तः सेवनात् यस्याः सा] N. of a plant ज्योतिष्मती लता (Mar. मालकांगोणी), which is said to stimulate digestion.

-दीप्तिः f. active state of digestion.

-दूत a. अग्निर्दूत इव यस्मिन् यस्य वा] having Agni for a messenger, said of the sacrifice or the deity invoked; यमं ह यज्ञो गच्छत्यग्निदूतो अरंकृतः Rv.1.14.13.

-दूषितः a. branded.

-देवः [अग्नि- रेव देवः] Agni; a worshipper of Agni.

-देवा [अग्निर्देवो यस्याः] the third lunar mansion, the Pleiades (कृत्तिका).

-द्वारम् the door on the south-east of a building; पूर्व- द्वारमथैशाने चाग्निद्वारं तु दक्षिणे । Māna.9.294-95.

-धानम् [अग्निर्धियते$स्मिन्] the place or receptacle for keeping the sacred fire, the house of अग्निहोतृ; पदं कृणुते अग्निधाने Rv. 1.165.3.

-धारणम् maintaining the sacred fire; व्रतिनां ˚णम् K. 55.

-नयनम् = ˚प्रणयनम्.

-निर्यासः [अग्नेर्ज- ठरानलस्येव दीपको निर्यासो यस्य] N. of the plant अग्निजार.

-नेत्र a. [अग्निर्नेता यस्य] having Agni for the leader or conveyer of oblations, an epithet of a god in general.

-पदम् 1 the word Agni.

-2 fire-place.

-3 N. of a plant.

-परिक्रि-ष्क्रि-या care of the sacred fire, worship of fire, offering oblations; गृहार्थो$ग्निपरिष्क्रिया Ms.2.67.

-परिच्छदः the whole sacrificial apparatus; गृह्यं चाग्निपरिच्छदम् Ms.6. 4.

-परिधानम् enclosing the sacrificial fire with a kind of screen.

-परीक्षा [तृ. त.] ordeal by fire.

-पर्वतः [अग्निसाधनं पर्वतः] a volcano; महता ज्वलता नित्यमग्निमेवाग्नि- पर्वतः Rām.5.35.43.

-पुच्छः [अग्नेः अग्न्याधानस्थानस्य पुच्छ इव]. tail or back part of the sacrificial place; the extinction of fire.

-पुराणम् [अग्निना प्रोक्तं पुराणम्] one of the 18 Purāṇas ascribed to Vyāsa. It derives its name from its having been communicated originally by Agni to the sage Vasiṣṭha for the purpose of instructing him in the two-fold knowledge of Brahman. Its stanzas are said to be 145. Its contents are varied. It has portions on ritual and mystic worship, cosmical descriptions, chapters on the duties of Kings and the art of war, a chapter on law, some chapters on Medicine and some treatises on Rhetoric, Prosody, Grammar, Yoga, Brahmavidyā &c. &c.

-प्रणयनम् bringing out the sacrificial fire and consecrating it according to the proper ritual.

-प्रणिधिः Incendiary. Dk.2.8.

-प्रतिष्ठा consecration of fire, especially the nuptial fire.

-प्रवेशः; -शनम [स. त.] entering the fire, self-immolation of a widow on the funeral pile of her husband.

-प्रस्कन्दनम् violation of the duties of a sacrificer (अग्निहोमाकरण); ˚परस्त्वं चाप्येवं भविष्यसि Mb.1.84.26.

-प्रस्तरः [अग्निं प्रस्तृणाति अग्नेः प्रस्तरो वा] a flint, a stone producing fire.

-बाहुः [अग्ने- र्बाहुरिव दीर्घशिखत्वात्]

1 smoke.

-2 N. of a son of the first Manu; Hariv. N. of a son of Priyavrata and Kāmyā. V. P.

-बीजम् 1 the seed of Agni; (fig.) gold (रुद्रतेजः समुद्भूतं हेमबीजं विभावसोः)

-2 N. of the letter र्.

-भम [अग्नि- रिव भाति; भा-क.]

1 'shining like fire,' gold.

-2 N. of the constellation कृत्तिका.

-भु n. [अग्नेर्भवति; भू-क्विप् ह्रस्वान्तः]

1 water.

-2 gold.

-भू a. [अग्नेर्भवतिः भू-क्विप्] produced from fire.

(भूः) 1 'fire-born,' N. of Kārttikeya.

-2 N. of a teacher (काश्यप) who was taught by Agni.

-3 (arith.) six.

-भूति a. produced from fire. (

-तिः) [अग्निरिव भूतिरैश्वर्यं यस्य] N. of a pupil of the last Tīrthaṅkara. (

-तिः) f. the lustre or might of fire.

-भ्राजस् a. Ved. [अग्निरिव भ्राजते; भ्राज्-असुन्] shining like fire. अग्निभ्राजसो विद्युतः Ṛv.5.54.11.

-मणिः [अग्नेरुत्थापको मणिः शाक. त.] the sunstone.

-मथ् m. [अग्निं मथ्नाति निष्पादयति; मन्थ्-क्विप्- नलोपः]

1 the sacrificer who churns the fuel-stick.

-2 the Mantra used in this operation, on the अरणि itself.

-मन्थः, -न्थनम्, producing fire by friction; or the Mantra used in this operation. (

-न्थः) [अग्निर्मथ्यते अनेन मन्थ्-करणे घञ्] N. of a tree गणिकारिका (Mar. नरवेल) Premna Spinosa (तत्काष्ठयोर्घर्षणे हि आशु वह्निरुत्पद्यते),

-मान्द्यम् slowness of digestion, loss of appetite, dyspepsia.

-मारुतिः अग्निश्च मरुच्च तयोरपत्यं इञ् ततो वृद्धिः इत् च; द्विपदवृद्धौ पृषो. पूर्वपदस्य ह्रस्वः Tv.] N. of the sage Agastya.

-मित्रः N. of a king of the Śunga dynasty, son of Puṣypamitra who must have flourished before 15 B. C. -the usually accepted date of Patañjali-as the latter mentions पुष्यमित्र by name.

-मुखः a. having Agni at the head. (

-खः) [अग्निर्मुखमिव यस्य]

1 a deity, god, (for the gods receive oblations through Agni who is, therefore, said to be their mouth; अग्निमुखा वै देवाः; अग्निर्मुखं प्रथमं देवतानाम् &c; or अग्निर्मुखे अग्रे येषाम्, for fire is said to have been created before all other gods.)

-2 [अग्निर्मुखं प्रधानमुपास्यो यस्य] one who maintains the sacred fire (अग्निहोतृद्विज)

-3 a Brāhmaṇa in general (अग्निर्दाहकत्वात् शापाग्निर्मुखे यस्य for Brāhmaṇas are said to be वाग्वज्राः).

-4 N. of two plants चित्रक Plumbago Zeylanica and भल्लातक Semicarpus Anacardium अग्निरिव स्पर्शात् दुःखदायकं मुखमग्रम् यस्य, तन्निर्यासस्पर्शेन हि देहे क्षतोत्पत्तेस्थयोस्तथात्वम्)

-5 a sort of powder or चूर्ण prescribed as a tonic by चक्रदत्त

-6 'fire- mouthed, sharp-biting, an epithet of a bug. Pt. 1. (

-खी) अग्निरिव मुखमग्रं यस्याः; गौरादि-ङीष्]

1 N. of a plant भल्लातक (Mar. बिबवा, भिलावा) and लाङ्गलिका (विषलाङ्गला).

-2 N. of the Gāyatri Mantra (अग्निरेव मुखं मुखत्वेन कल्पितं यस्याः सा, or अग्नेरिव मुखं प्रजापतिमुखं उत्पत्ति- द्वारं यस्याः, अग्निना समं प्रजापतिमुखजातत्वात्; कदाचिदपि नो विद्वान् गायत्रीमुदके जपेत् । गायत्र्याग्निमुखी यस्मात्तस्मादुत्थाय तां जपेत् ॥ गोभिल).

-3 a kitchen [पाकशाला अग्निरिव उत्तप्तं मुखं यस्याः सा].

-मूढ a. [तृ. त.] Ved. made insane or stupefied by lightning or fire.

-यन्त्रम् A gun अग्नियन्त्रधरैश्चक्रधरैश्च पुरुषैर्वृतः Śivabhārata 12.17.

-यानम् An aeroplane. व्योमयानं विमानं स्यात् अग्नियानं तदेव हि । अगस्त्यसंहिता.

-योगः See पञ्चाग्निसाधन. अग्नियोगवहो ग्रीष्मे विधिदृष्टेन कर्मणा । चीर्त्वा द्वादशवर्षाणि राजा भवति पार्थिवः ॥ Mb.13.14,2.43.

-योजनम् causing the sacrificial fire to blaze up.

-रक्षणम् 1 con- secrating or preserving the sacred (domestic) fire or अग्निहोत्र.

-2 [अग्निः रक्ष्यते अनेन अत्र वा] a Mantra securing for Agni protection from evil spirits &c.

-3 the house of an अग्निहोतृ.

-रजः, -रजस् m. [अग्निरिव रज्यते दीप्यते; रञ्ज्-असुन् नलोपः]

1 a scarlet insect by name इन्द्रगोप.

-2 (अग्नेः रजः) the might or power of Agni.

-3 gold. Mb.3. 16.86.7

-रहस्यम् mystery of (worshipping &c.) Agni; N. of the tenth book of Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa.

-राशिः a heap of fire, burning pile.

-रुहा [अग्निरिव रोहति रुह्-क] N. of the plant मांसादनी or मांसरोहिणी (तदङ्कुरस्य वह्नितुल्य- वर्णतया उत्पन्नत्वात्तथात्वं तस्याः).

-रूप a. [अग्नेरिव रूपं वर्णो यस्य] fire-shaped; of the nature of fire.

-रूपम् the nature of fire.

-रेतस् n. the seed of Agni; (hence) gold.

-रोहिणी [अग्निरिव रोहति; रुह्-णिनि] a hard inflammatory swelling in the armpit.

-लोकः the world a Agni, which is situated below the summit of Meru; in the Purāṇas it is said to be in the अन्तरिक्ष, while in the Kāśī Khaṇḍa it is said to be to the south of इन्द्रपुरी; एतस्या दक्षिणे भागे येयं पूर्दृश्यते शुभा । इमामर्चिष्मतीं पश्य वीतिहोत्रपुरीं शुभाम् ॥

-वधूः Svāhā, the daughter of Dakṣa and wife of Agni

-वर्चस् a. [अग्नेर्वर्च इव वर्चो यस्य] glowing or bright like fire. (n.) the lustre of Agni. (-m.) N. of a teacher of the Purāṇas.

-वर्ण a. [अग्नेरिव वर्णो यस्य] of the colour of fire; hot; fiery; सुरां पीत्वा द्विजो मोहादग्निवर्णां सुरां पिबेत् Ms.11.9; गोमूत्रमग्निवर्णं वा पिबेदुदकमेव वा 91.

(र्णः) 1 N. of a prince, son of Sudarśana.

-2 N. of a King of the solar race, See R.19.1. the colour of fire. (

-र्णा) a strong liquor.

-वर्धक a. stimulating digestion, tonic.

(-कः) 1 a tonic.

-2 regimen, diet (पथ्याहार).

-वल्लभः [अग्नेर्वल्लभः सुखेन दाह्यत्वात्]

1 the Śāla tree, Shorea Robusta.

-2 the resinous juice of it.

-वासस् a. [अग्निरिव शुद्धं वासो यस्य] having a red (pure like Agni) garment. (n.) a pure garment.

-वाह a. [अग्निं वाहयति अनुमापयति वा]

1 smoke.

-2 a goat.

-वाहनम् a goat (छाग).

-विद् m.

1 one who knows the mystery about Agni.

-2 an अग्निहोत्रिन् q. v.

-विमोचनम् ceremony of lowering the sacrificial fire.

-विसर्पः pain from an inflamed tumour, inflammation.

-विहरणम्, -विहारः 1 taking the sacrificial fire from आग्नीध्र to the उत्तरवेदि.

-2 offering oblations to fire; प्रत्यासन्ना ˚वेला K.348.

-वीर्यम् 1 power or might of Agni.

-2 gold.

-वेतालः Name of Vetāla (connected with the story of Vikra- māditya).

-वेशः [अग्नेर्वेश इव] N. of an ancient medical authority (चरक).

-वेश्मन् m. the fourteenth day of the karma-ṃāsa; Sūryaprajñapti.

-वेश्यः 1 N. of a teacher, Mbh.

-2 Name of the 22nd muhūrta; Sūryapraj- ñapti. धौम्य cf. Mb 14.64.8.

-शरणम्, -शाला-लम् a fire-sanctuary; ˚मार्गमादेशय Ś.5; a house or place for keeping the sacred fire; ˚रक्षणाय स्थापितो$हम् V.3.

-शर्मन् a. [अग्निरिव शृणाति तीव्रकोपत्वात् शॄ-मनिन्] very passionate. (-m.) N. of a sage.

-शिख a. [अग्नेरिव अग्निरिव वा शिखा यस्य] fiery, fire-crested; दहतु ˚खैः सायकैः Rām.

(-खः) 1 a lamp.

-2 a rocket, fiery arrow.

-3 an arrow in general.

-4 safflower plant.

-5 saffron.

-6 जाङ्गलीवृक्ष.

(-खम्) 1 saffron.

-2 gold.

(-खा) 1 a flame; शरैरग्निशिखोपमैः Mb.

-2 N. of two plants लाङ्गली (Mar. वागचबका or कळलावी) Gloriosa Superba; of other plants (also Mar. कळलावी) Meni- spermum Cordifolium.

-शुश्रूषा careful service or worship of fire.

-शेखर a. fire-crested. (

-रः) N. of the कुसुम्भ, कुङ्कुम and जाङ्गली trees (

-रम्) gold,

-शौच a. [अग्नेरिव शौचं यस्य] bright as fire; purified by fire K.252.

-श्री a. [अग्नेरिव श्रीर्यस्य] glowing like fire; lighted by Agni

-ष्टुत्, -ष्टुभ, -ष्टोम &c. see ˚ स्तुत्, ˚स्तुभ् &c.

-ष्ठम् 1 kitchen; अग्निष्ठेष्वग्निशालासु Rām.6.1.16.

-2 a fire-pan.

-संयोगाः explosives. Kau. A.2.3.

-ष्वात्तः see स्वात्तः

-संस्कारः 1 consecration of fire.

-2 hallowing or con- secrating by means of fire; burning on the funeral pile; यथार्हं ˚रं मालवाय दत्वा Dk.169; नास्य कार्यो$ग्निसंस्कारः Ms.5.69, पितरीवाग्निसंस्कारात्परा ववृतिरे क्रियाः । R.12.56.

-सखः; -सहायः 1 the wind.

-2 the wild pigeon (smoke- coloured).

-3 smoke.

-सम्भव a. [प. ब.] sprung or pro- duced from fire.

(-वः) 1 wild safflower.

-2 lymph, result of digestion. (

-वम्) gold.

-साक्षिक [अग्निः साक्षी यत्र, कप्] a. or adv. keeping fire for a witness, in the presence of fire; पञ्चबाण˚ M.4.12. ˚मर्यादो भर्ता हि शरणं स्त्रियाः H.1.v. l, R.11.48.

-सारम् [अग्नौ सारं यस्य अत्यन्तानलोत्तापनेपि सारांशादहनात् Tv.] रसाञ्जन, a sort of medical preparation for the eyes. (

-रः -रम्) power or essence of fire.

-सुतः Kārttikeya; त्वामद्य निहनिष्यामि क्रौञ्चमग्निसुतो यथा । Mb.7.156.93.

-सूत्रम् a thread of fire.

-2 a girdle of sacrificial grass (मौञ्जीमेखला) put upon a young Brāhmaṇa at the time of investiture.

-सूनुः (See -सुतः), (सेनानीरग्निभूर्गुहः । Amar.); देव्यङ्कसंविष्ट- मिवाग्निसूनुम् । Bu. ch.1.67.

-स्तम्भः 1 stopping the burning power of Agni.

-2 N. of a Mantra used in this operation.

-3 N. of a medicine so used.

-स्तुत् m. (अग्निष्टुत्) [अग्निः स्तूयते$त्र; स्तु-आधारे क्विप् षत्वम्] the first day of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice; N. of a por- tion of that sacrifice which extends over one day; यजेत वाश्वमेधेन स्वर्जिता गोसवेन वा । अभिजिद्विश्वजिद्भ्यां वा त्रिवृता- ग्निष्टुतापि वा ॥ Ms.11.74.

-स्तुभ् (˚ष्टुभ्) m. [अग्निः स्तुभ्यते$त्र; स्तुभ्-क्विप् षत्वम्]

1 = अग्निष्टोम.

-2 N. of a son of the sixth Manu.

-रतोमः (˚ष्टोमः) [अग्नेः स्तोमः स्तुतिसाधनं यत्र]

1 N. of a protracted ceremony or sacrificeial rite extending over several days in spring and forming an essential part of the ज्योतिष्टोम.

-2 a Mantra or Kalpa with reference to this sacrifice; ˚मे भवो मन्त्रः ˚मः; ˚मस्य व्याख्यानम्, कल्पः ˚मः P.IV.3.66. Vārt.

-3 N. of the son of the sixth Manu.

-4 a species of the Soma plant; ˚सामन् a part of the Sāma Veda chanted at the conclu- sion of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice.

-सावर्णिः Name of Manu.

-स्थ a. (ष्ठ) [अग्नौ स्थातुमर्हति; स्था-क षत्वम्] placed in, over, or near the fire. (ष्ठः) an iron frying-pan; in the अश्वमेध sacrifice the 11th Yūpa which of all the 21 is nearest the fire.

-स्वात्तः (written both as ˚स्वात्त and ˚ष्वात्त) (pl.) [अग्नितः i. e. श्राद्धीयविप्रकर- रूपानलात् सुष्ठु आत्तं ग्रहणं येषां ते] N. of a class of Pitṛs or Manes who, when living on earth, maintained the sacred or domestic fires, but who did not perform the Agniṣṭoma and other sacrifices. They are regarded as Manes of Gods and Brāhmaṇas and also as descen- dants of Marīchi; Ms.3.195. अग्निष्वात्ताः पितर एह गच्छत Tsy.2.5.12.2. (मनुष्यजन्मन्यग्निष्टोमादियागमकृत्वा स्मार्तकर्मनिष्ठाः सन्तो मृत्वा च पितृत्वं गताः इति सायणः).

-हुत्, -होतृ Ved. sacrificing to Agni, having Agni for a priest; Rv.1.66.8.

-होत्रम् [अग्नये हूयते$त्र, हु-त्र, च. त.]

1 an oblation to Agni (chiefly of milk, oil and sour gruel.).

-2 maintenance of the sacred fire and offering oblation to it; (अग्नये होत्रं होमो$स्मिन् कर्मणीति अग्निहोत्रमिति कर्मनाम); or the sacred fire itself; तपोवनाग्निहोत्रधूमलेखासु K.26. होता स्यात् ˚त्रस्य Ms.11.36. ˚त्रमुपासते 42; स्त्रीं दाहयेत् ˚त्रेण Ms.5.167,6.4, दाहयित्वाग्निहोत्रेण स्त्रियं वृत्तवतीम् Y.1.89. The time of throwing oblations into the fire is, as ordained by the sun himself, evening (अग्नये सायं जुहुयात् सूर्याय प्रातर्जुहुयात्). Agnihotra is of two kinds; नित्य of constant obligation (यावज्जीवमग्निहोत्रं जुहोति) and काम्य occasional or optional (उपसद्भिश्चरित्वा मासमेकमग्निहोत्रं जुहोति). (

-त्र) a. Ved.

1 destined for, connected with, Agnihotra.

-2 sacrificing to Agni. ˚न्यायः The rule according to which the नित्यकर्मन्s (which are to be performed यावज्जीवम्) are performed at their stipulated or scheduled time only, during one's life time. This is discussed and established by जैमिनि and शबर at Ms.6. 2.23-26. in connection with अग्निहोत्र and other कर्मन्s. ˚हवनी (णी) a ladle used in sacrificial libations, or अग्निहोत्रहविर्ग्रहणी ऋक् Tv.; See हविर्ग्रहणी; ˚हुत् offering the अग्निहोत्र; ˚आहुतिः invocation or oblation connected with अग्निहोत्र.

-होत्रिन् a. [अग्निहोत्र-मत्वर्थे इनि]

1 one who practises the Agnihotra, or consecrates and maintains the sacred fire.

-2 one who has prepared the sacrifi- cial place.

-होत्री Sacrificial cow; तामग्निहोत्रीमृषयो जगृहु- र्ब्रह्मवादिनः Bhāg.8.8.2.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > अग्निः _agniḥ

99 that

I
pron (pl those) А dem

1) це

what is that — є що це таке?; that you, John? це ти, Джон?; are those your children є це ваші дітиє; це, цього е т. д.; от що

that's not fair — це несправедливо

that's just like her — це так на неї схоже, у цьому вона вся

have things come to that — є невже до цього дійшло?; and so that is settled отже, це вирішено; эмоц.- підсил. ось, от

those are something like shoes — ось це туфлі

good stuff that! — от це правильно /здброво/!; = от це я розумію!; у протиставленні this те

this is new and that is old — це нове, а те старе

2) викор. замість іншого слова або словосполучення, згаданих вище, щоб уникнути повторення заміняє групу іменника

the climate there is like that of France — клімат там схожий на клімат Франції

I have only two pairs of shoes and those are old — у мене тільки дві пари черевик, та е ті поношені; заміняє групу дієслова, эмоц.- підсил.

they must be very curious creatures.- They are that — це, мабуть, дуже дивні створіння. - Так воно, є

3) у корелятивних займенникових сполученнях той ( який)

Fine art is that in which the hand, the head, and the heart go together — мистецтво - це така область, де руки, думки е душа єдині

those who wish to go may do so — хто хоче, може піти; эліпт. той який

be that thou know'st thou art — будь самим собою

4) перше ( з вищезгаданих)

work and play are both necessary to health. this gives us rest and that gives us energy, — праця е розвага необхідні для здоров'я - одне /перше/ розвиває енергію, інше /останнє/ дає відпочинок Б rel

5) який, яка, які (звичн. йде безпосередньо за обумовленим словом; часто може бути опущене)

this is about all that he has to say — це в основному все, що він може сказати

the letter that came yesterday — той лист, що прийшов вчора

the man (that) you were looking for has come — (т людина, яку ви шукали, прийшла)

during the years (that) he had spent abroad — протягом ( тих) років, що він провів за кордоном

the envelope (that) I put it in — ( той) конверт, у який я це поклав

this is he that brought the news — от той, хто приніс цю звістку; у сполученні зі словами, що позначають час коли

the night (that) we went to the theatre — у той вечір, коли ми ходили в театр; пoeт.; icт. те що, всі що, той хто, усякий хто ( обумовлене слово мається на увазі)

I am that I am — я залишаюся самим собою

6) у ввідних реченнях як не, хоч е

wicked man that he was he would not consent to it — хоч, дурний він був, він не погоджувався на це; в окличних реченнях

wretch that I am! — о я нещасний!, нещасний я!

fool that he is! — ну е дурень же він!, дурень він нещасний! В пpикм.

7) цей, ця, це; той, та, те

since that time [moment, day, year] — з того /із цього/ часу [моменту, дня, року]

in those days y — ті часи

that man will get on! — ця людина свого доможеться!; у протиставлення this той, та, те

this book is interesting and that one is not — ця книга цікава(я), а та ні; у сполученні з here, there прост ось, он

that here chair and that there table — ось цей стілець, он той стіл

8) эмоц.- підсил. часто в сполученні із власним ім'ям цей, ця, це

how is that leg of yours — є ну, як ваша ногає

I don't like that house of hers — не подобається мені ( цей) її будинок; (зам. those) ці

that ill manners — ці мої дурні манери

9) icт. такий, настільки, так

he blushed to that degree that I felt ill at ease — він так /настільки / почервонів, що мені стало ніяково Г пpиcл. так, настільки

I can't walk that far — я не можу йти так далеко; дiaл., aмep. стільки, так

he talks that much! — він стільки говорить!

he is that sleepy — він такий сонний Д визначеного артикля

10) той, та, те; цей, ця, це

what was that noise — є що це був за шумє

11) у корелятивних займенникових сполученнях той ( який), та (як, те (яке))

that part which concerns us — (т частина, що нас стосується)

(and) that 's that — так-то от; такі-то справи; нічого не поробиш; отож, значить; на цьому крапка

and all that, — все ( таке) інше;, так далі

after that — після того, що; після того, як

at that — після цього; потім; aмep. при всьому при тому; до того ж; поверх того на цьому

and usually I leave it at that, — на атом я звичайно припиняю розмову

by that — на той час; ( під) цим

what do you mean by that — є що ви цим хочете сказати?

upon /with/that — коли; як ( тільки); після цього; при цьому; з цими словами

with that she took out her handkerchief — з цими словами вона вийняла носову хустинку

that 's all that — все

that's a good boy!, that's a dear! — от, добре, правильно!, молодець!, розумник!

like that — так; таким /подібним/ чином

why are you crying like that — є чого ти так плачеш?

a man like that — подібна людина

come out of that! — cл. забирайся!, вимітайся!

take that! — на, тримай!, от тобі! ( при ударі)

this and that — див. this
II
cj

1) вводить присудкові, додаткові е аппозитивні придаткові речення (те) що

that they were brothers was clear — те, що вони брати, було ясно

the thought that he would be late oppressed him — думка, що він спізниться, гнітила його

2) вводить придаткові додаткові реченяя е присудки із причинним відтінком значення що, тому що; тому що

I'm sorry that this has happened — мені дуже шкода, що так трапилося

3) вводить придаткову мету (часто so that, in order that) так ( щоб)

let's finish now (so) that we can rest tomorrow — давайте закінчимо зараз, ( так) щоб завтра можна було відпочити

they kept quiet so that he might sleep — вони сиділи тихо, щоб дати йому поспати

4) вводить підрядне результату (звичн. з so, such y головному реченні) що

I am so tired that I can hardly stand — я так стомився, що ледве стою; причини (звичн. після питального або заперечувального головного речення) що

who is he- everybody supports him — є хто він такий, що всі підтримують йогоє; з'ясувальні що

you have well done that you have come — ви добре зробили, що прийшли; необхідного наслідку або супроводу (звичн. після заперечувального головного речення) (без того) щоб

never a month goes by that he does not write to us — не проходить, місяця, щоб він не написав нам

5) вводить підрядні речення в склад емфатичних складних речень

it was there that I first met her — тут Я зустрів її вперше

6) вводить окличні речення, що виражають подив, обурення, сильне бажання щоб, що

that he should behave like that! — щоб він себе так вів!

that one so fair should be so false! — така гарна, така брехуха!

7) icт. вводить підрядне речення, паралельне попередньому підрядному, вжитому з іншим союзом; перекладається як союз першого підрядного

although the rear was attacked and that fifty men were captured — незважаючи на те, що атака був проведена з тилу е незважаючи на те, що п'ятдесят солдатів були захоплені в полон

8) icт. йде за рядом союзів, не змінюючи їхнього значення

because that — тому що, тому що

if that — якщо

lest that — щоб не

though that — хоча

9) у сполученнях

not that — не те щоб; наскільки

not that it matters, but the letter has not been sent yet — я не хочу сказати, що це так вже, важливо, але лист усе ще не відправлений

in that — тим що; оскільки; тому що

some of his books have become classics in that they are read by most students interested in anthropology — деякі з його книг стали класичними, їх читають майже всі студенти, що цікавляться антропологією

but that — якби не

I would have gone with you but that I am so busy — я б пішов з вами, якби я не був так зайнятий; щоб не

he is not such a fool but-that he can see it — він не так дурний, щоб не бачити цього; після негативних речень що

I don't deny [doubt]bat that he is right — я не заперечую [сумніваюся], що він правий; не те щоб

not but that he believed it himself — не те щоб він вірив цьому сам

except that — крім того, що; не вважаючи того, що

save that — icт. = except that [див. except 2]

notwithstanding that — icт. хоча, незважаючи на те, що

English-Ukrainian dictionary > that

100 ποιέω

ποιέω (Hom.+) impf. ἐποίουν; fut. ποιήσω; 1 aor. ἐποίησα; pf. πεποίηκα; plpf. πεποιήκειν Mk 15:7 (as IMagnMai 93b, 24; on the omission of the augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Mid.: impf. ἐποιούμην; 1 aor. ἐποιησάμην; pf. πεποίημαι 1 Cl 1:1. Pass. (has disappeared almost entirely; B-D-F §315): 1 fut. ποιηθήσομαι; 1 aor. 3 pl. ἐποιήθησαν (En 22:9); pf. 3 sg. πεποίηται (Ec 8:14; Tat. 11, 2), ptc. πεποιημένος (Ec 1:14 al.) Hb 12:27. A multivalent term, often without pointed semantic significance, used in ref. to a broad range of activity involving such matters as bringing someth. into being, bringing someth. to pass, or simply interacting in some way with a variety of entities.

① to produce someth. material, make, manufacture, produce τὶ someth. (Gen 6:14ff; 33:17 al.; JosAs 16:8; GrBar 3:5 ‘build’; ApcMos 20; Mel., P. 38, 261).

ⓐ of human activity: σκεῦος 2 Cl 8:2. χιτῶνας, ἱμάτια Ac 9:39. εἰκόνα Rv 13:14b. θεούς make gods Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1). ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς 19:24. ἀνθρακιάν J 18:18. τέσσαρα μέρη 19:23 (s. μέρος 1a). πηλόν 9:11, 14. σκηνὰς pitch tents, build huts (1 Ch 15:1; 2 Esdr 18: 16f; Jdth 8:5; Jos., Ant. 3, 79; Just., D. 127, 3 σκηνήν) Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. ἁγίασμα GJs 6:1; καταπέτασμα τῷ ναῷ 10:1; τὴν πορφύραν καὶ τὸ κόκκινον 12:1.—Used w. prepositional expressions ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν (i.e. τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ μαρτυρίου) κατὰ τὸν τύπον to make it (the tent of testimony) according to the model (Ex 25:40) Ac 7:44; cp. Hb 8:5. ποιεῖν τι ἔκ τινος make someth. from or out of someth. (i.e. fr. a certain material; Hdt. 2, 96; cp. X., An. 4, 5, 14; Theophr., HP 4, 2, 5; Ex 20:24f; 28:15; 29:2) J 2:15; 9:6; Ro 9:21.

ⓑ of divine activity, specifically of God’s creative activity create (Hes., Op. 109; Heraclitus, Fgm. 30 κόσμον οὔτε τις θεῶν οὔτε ἀνθρώπων ἐποίησεν, ἀλλʼ ἦν ἀεὶ καὶ ἔστιν καὶ ἔσται; Pla., Tim. 76c ὁ ποιῶν ‘the Creator’; Epict. 1, 6, 5; 1, 14, 10; 2, 8, 19 σε ὁ Ζεὺς πεποίηκε; 4, 1, 102; 107; 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν; Ael. Aristid. 43, 7 K.=1 p. 2 D.: Ζεὺς τὰ πάντα ἐποίησεν; Herm. Wr. 4, 1. In LXX oft. for בָּרָא also Wsd 1:13; 9:9; Sir 7:30; 32:13; Tob 8:6; Jdth 8:14; Bar 3:35; 4:7; 2 Macc 7:28; Aristobulus in Eus., PE13, 12, 12 [pp. 182 and 184 Holladay]; JosAs 9:5; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 65 and oft.; SibOr 3, 28 and Fgm. 3, 3; 16; Just., A II, 5, 2 al.) w. acc. ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα Ac 7:50 (Is 66:2). τοὺς αἰῶνας Hb 1:2 (s. αἰών 3). τὸν κόσμον (Epict. 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον; Sallust. 5 p. 10, 29; Wsd 9:9; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 21 [Stone p. 24]) Ac 17:24. τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν (cp. Ael. Aristid. above; Gen 1:1; Ex 20:11; Ps 120:2; 145:6; Is 37:16; Jer 39:17 et al.; TestJob 2:4; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 121; Aristobulus above) Ac 4:24; 14:15b; cp. Rv 14:7. τὰ πάντα PtK 2 p. 13, 26 (JosAs 12, 2; Just., D. 55, 2; also s. Ael. Aristid. above). Lk 11:40 is classed here by many. Of the relation of Jesus to God Ἰησοῦν, πιστὸν ὄντα τῷ ποιήσαντι αὐτόν= appointed him Hb 3:2 (cp. Is 17:7).—W. a second acc., that of the predicate (PSI 435, 19 [258 B.C.] ὅπως ἂν ὁ Σάραπις πολλῷ σὲ μείζω ποιήσῃ) ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς (God) created them male and female Mt 19:4b; Mk 10:6 (both Gen 1:27c).—Pass. Hb 12:27.—ὁ ποιήσας the Creator Mt 19:4a v.l.

② to undertake or do someth. that brings about an event, state, or condition, do, cause, bring about, accomplish, prepare, etc.

ⓐ ἔργα π. do deeds, also in sg. (as JosAs 29:3 μὴ ποιήσῃς τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο) τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ π. do as Abraham did J 8:39. τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν vs. 41; cp. 10:37. τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα Rv 2:5. ἔργον commit a deed 1 Cor 5:2 v.l. ἔργον ποίησον εὐαγγελιστοῦ 2 Ti 4:5 (s. ἔργον 2).—ἔργον or ἔργα somet. refer to wondrous deeds: ἓν ἔργον ἐποίησα I have done just one (wondrous) deed J 7:21. Pl. 14:12a; cp. vs. 12bc. This illustrates the transition to

ⓑ do, perform miracles δυνάμεις Mt 7:22; 13:58; Ac 19:11 (Just., A I, 26, 2 al.); sg. Mk 6:5; 9:39. θαυμάσια Mt 21:15 (cp. Sir 31:9). μεγάλα καὶ θαυμάσια AcPl Ha 8, 33=BMM verso 5f (Just., A I, 62, 4). σημεῖα (Ex 4:17) J 2:23; 3:2; 7:31; 9:16; 11:47b; 20:30; Rv 13:13a; 16:14; 19:20. Sing. J 6:30; 10:41. τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα Ac 6:8; 7:36. ὅσα Mk 3:8; 6:30; Lk 9:10.—Ac 10:39; 14:11.

ⓒ of conditions bring about, etc.: εἰρήνην make, establish peace Eph 2:15; Js 3:18 (cp. 2 Macc 1:4). τὴν ἔκβασιν provide a way out 1 Cor 10:13 (on the foll. gen. of the inf. w. the art. s. B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1067). ἐπίστασιν ὄχλου cause a disturbance among the people Ac 24:12. τὰ σκάνδαλα create difficulties Ro 16:17. On Mk 6:20 v.l. KRomaniuk, ETL 69, ’93, 140f.—W. dat. of advantage ἐποίουν χαρὰν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς they brought joy to the members Ac 15:3 (s. ἀδελφός 2a).

ⓓ used w. a noun as a periphrasis for a simple verb of doing (s. 7a below; B-D-F §310, 1.—ποιέω in such combinations as early as IPriene 8, 63 [c. 328 B.C.], also Plut., Crass. 551 [13, 6]; s. ἑορτή, end). ἐποίησεν ᾆσμα GJs 6:3. διαθήκην π. Hb 8:9 (Jer 38:32 cod. Q; cp. Is 28:15; TestAbr A 8 p. 86, 6 [Stone p. 20] διάταξιν). π. τὴν ἐκδίκησιν Lk 18:7f; cp. Ac 7:24 (s. ἐκδίκησις 1). ἐνέδραν 25:3. κοπετόν 8:2. κρίσιν (s. κρίσις 1aα and β) J 5:27; Jd 15. θρῆνον GJs 3:1. κυνηγίαν AcPl Ha 1, 33. λύτρωσιν Lk 1:68. ὁδὸν ποιεῖν (v.l. ὁδοποιεῖν) Mk 2:23 (ὁδός 2). π. (τὸν) πόλεμον (μετά τινος) wage war (on someone) Rv 11:7; 12:17; 13:7 (Da 7:8 LXX; 7:21 Theod.; Gen 14:2). πρόθεσιν Eph 3:11; συμβούλιον π. Mk 3:6 v.l.; 15:1; συστροφήν Ac 23:12; cp. vs. 13. φόνον Mk 15:7 (cp. Dt 22:8; Callinicus, Vi. Hyp. 98, 21 Bonn; TestAbr B 10 p. 115, 4 [Stone p. 78, 4]).—τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν τινι vs. 15 s. ἱκανός 1.

ⓔ what is done is indicated by the neut. of an adj. or pron.: τὸ ἀγαθὸν π. do what is good Ro 13:3; τὰ ἀγαθὰ π. J 5:29; ἀγαθὸν π. do good Mk 3:4; 1 Pt 3:11 (Ps 33:15). τὸ καλὸν Ro 7:21; 2 Cor 13:7b; Gal 6:9. τὰ καλὰ (καὶ εὐάρεστα ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ) 1 Cl 21:1. καλόν Js 4:17. τὸ κακόν Ro 13:4. τὰ κακά 3:8. κακόν 2 Cor 13:7a (κακὸν μηδέν; cp. SIG 1175, 20 κακόν τι ποιῆσαι). κακά 1 Pt 3:12 (Ps 33:17). τὰ ἀρεστὰ αὐτῷ (=τῷ θεῷ) J 8:29; cp. Hb 13:21b; 1J 3:22 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 12 [Stone p. 40] πάντα τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον σου ἐποίησεν). πάντα 1 Cor 9:23; 10:31b; IEph 15:3.—ὅ Mt 26:13; Mk 14:9; J 13:7, 27a. τοῦτο Mt 13:28; Mk 5:32; Lk 5:6; J 14:13, 14 v.l.; AcPl Ha 9, 27; Ro 7:15f, 20 (cp. Epict. 2, 26, 4 ὸ̔ θέλει οὐ ποιεῖ καὶ ὸ̔ μὴ θέλει ποιεῖ); 1 Cor 11:24f (the specific sense ‘sacrifice’ in this passage is opposed by TAbbott [JBL 9, 1890, 137–52], but favored by FMozley [ET 7, 1896, 370–86], AAndersen [D. Abendmahl in d. ersten zwei Jahrh. 1904], and K Goetz [D. Abendmahlsfrage² 1907]). αὐτὸ τοῦτο Gal 2:10. ταῦτα Mt 21:23; 23:23; Gal 5:17; 2 Pt 1:10b. αὐτά J 13:17; Ro 1:32; 2:3. τὸ αὐτό Mt 5:46, 47b.—τί ποιήσω; Mk 10:17; cp. J 18:35 (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 19 [Stone p. 10]; ParJer 6:14 τί ποιήσωμεν; ApcEsdr 7:4 p. 32, 14 Tdf.). τί ἀγαθὸν ποιήσω; Mt 19:16. τί κακὸν ἐποίησεν; Mt 27:23; Lk 23:22; Mk 15:14. τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε; Mt 5:47a. τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο; what is this that you are doing? or why are you doing this? Mk 11:3 (GrBar 2:2 τί ἐποίησας τοῦτο; s. B-D-F §299, 1; Rob. 736; 738; Rdm.² 25f). τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε; Ac 14:15a (as Demosth. 55, 5). τί σὺ ὧδε ποιεῖς; Hv 1, 1, 5. W. ptc. foll. (B-D-F §414, 5; Rob. 1121) τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες; what are you doing, untying? Mk 11:5. τί ποιεῖτε κλαίοντες; what are you doing, weeping? or what do you mean by weeping? Ac 21:13. τί ποιήσουσιν οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι; what are they to do, who have themselves baptized? 1 Cor 15:29.—A statement of what is to be done follows in an indirect question ὸ̔ ποιεῖς ποίησον do what you must do J 13:27 (as Epict. 3, 21, 24 ποίει ἃ ποιεῖς; 3, 23, 1; 4, 9, 18; TestJob 7:13).

ⓕ of meals or banquets, and of festivities of which a banquet is the principal part give ἄριστον Lk 14:12. δεῖπνον (q.v. bα) Mk 6:21; Lk 14:12, 16; J 12:2; Hs 5, 2, 9. δοχήν (s. δοχή) Lk 5:29; 14:13; GJs 6:2. γάμους (s. γάμος 1a) Mt 22:2 (JosAs 20:6).—Keep, celebrate (PFay 117, 12) the Passover (feast) Mt 26:18; Hb 11:28 (s. πάσχα 3). Also in connection w. τὴν ἑορτὴν ποιῆσαι Ac 18:21 D the Passover is surely meant. But π. is also used of festivals in general (cp. X., Hell. 4, 5, 2 ποιεῖν Ἴσθμια; 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια).

ⓖ of the natural processes of growth; in plant life send out, produce, bear, yield καρπόν, καρπούς (Aristot., Plant. 1, 4, 819b, 31; 2, 10, 829a, 41; LXX [καρπός 1aα]) Mt 3:10; 7:17ab, 18, 19; 13:26; Lk 3:9; 6:43ab; 8:8; 13:9; Rv 22:2; also in imagery Mt 3:8; 21:43; Lk 3:8. κλάδους Mk 4:32. ἐλαίας Js 3:12a (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 50 ἄμπελοι, αἳ ποιοῦσιν τὸν οἶνον). π. ὕδωρ produce water vs. 12b (but s. ἁλυκός).—Of capital yielding a return ἡ μνᾶ ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς the mina has made five minas Lk 19:18. Also of a person who operates w. capital make money (Ps.-Demosth. 10, 76; Polyb. 2, 62, 12) ἐποίησεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα Mt 25:16 v.l.

ⓗ with focus on causality

α. The result of the action is indicated by the acc. and inf.; make (to), cause (someone) to, bring it about that (Hom. et al.; also ins [SIG IV p. 510a index], pap, LXX; TestJob 3:7; 42:6; ParJer 9:16f; ApcMos 16; Just., A I, 26, 5, D. 69, 6; 114, 1; Ath. 13, 2) ποιεῖ αὐτὴν μοιχευθῆναι Mt 5:32. ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλεεῖς ἀνθρώπων Mk 1:17. Cp. 7:37b; Lk 5:34 ( force someone to fast); J 6:10; Ac 17:26; Rv 13:13b.—ἵνα takes the place of the inf.: ποιήσω αὐτοὺς ἵνα ἥξουσιν Rv 3:9; cp. 13:12b, 16. ἵνα without acc. (TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 20 [Stone p. 68] ποίησον ἵνα φαγῶμεν) J 11:37; Col 4:16; Rv 13:15.—ἡμῖν ὡς πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν us, as though we had caused him to walk Ac 3:12 (s. B-D-F §400, 7).

β. w. a double accusative, of the obj. and the pred. (Hom. et al.; LXX; ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 38, 32 Tdf. λίθους ἄρτους ποιήσας; Mel., P. 68, 494 ποιήσας ἡμᾶς ἱεράτευμα καινόν), make someone or someth. (into) someth. W. noun as predicate acc.: ποιήσω ὑμᾶς ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων Mt 4:19. ὑμεῖς αὐτὸν (i.e. τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ) ποιεῖτε σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 21:13; Mk 11:17; Lk 19:46. Cp. Mt 23:15b; J 2:16; 4:46, 54; cp. 2:11; Ac 2:36; 2 Cor 5:21; Hb 1:7 (Ps 103:4); Rv 1:6; 3:12 al. ποίησόν με ὡς ἕνα τ. μισθίων σου Lk 15:19, 21 v.l. (cp. Gen 45:8; 48:20 and s. B-D-F §453, 4; Rob. 481). If the obj. acc. is missing, it may be supplied fr. the context as self-evident ἁρπάζειν αὐτὸν ἵνα ποιήσωσιν βασιλέα take him by force, in order to make (him) king J 6:15.—1 Cor 6:15. Claim that someone is someth., pretend that someone is someth. J 8:53; 10:33; 19:7, 12; 1J 1:10; 5:10. Cp. 5b.—W. adj. as predicate acc.: εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους (Is 40:3) make the paths straight Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4. τρίχα λευκὴν π. Mt 5:36. Cp. 12:16; 20:12b; 26:73; 28:14; Mk 3:12; J 5:11, 15; 7:23; 16:2; Ac 7:19; Eph 2:14 ὁ ποιήσας τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν; Rv 12:15; 21:5. ἴσον ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν τῷ θεῷ (thereby) declaring that he was equal to God or making himself equal to God J 5:18.—Cp. use of the mid. 7b below.

γ. w. adv. of place send outside ἔξω ποιεῖν τινα put someone out (=send outside; cp. X., Cyr. 4, 1, 3 ἔξω βελῶν ποιεῖν=‘put outside bowshot’) Ac 5:34.

③ to carry out an obligation of a moral or social nature, do, keep, carry out, practice, commit

ⓐ do, keep the will or law obediently τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ etc. (JosAs 12:3; s. θέλημα 1cγ) Mt 7:21; 12:50; Mk 3:35; J 4:34; 6:38; 7:17; 9:31; Eph 6:6; Hb 10:7, 9 (both Ps 39:9), 36; 13:21; 1J 2:17; Pol 2:2; τὰ θελήματα Mk 3:35 v.l.; Ac 13:22; GEb 121, 34. π. τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός Eph 2:3. Cp. Mt 21:31.—π. τὸν νόμον J 7:19; Gal 5:3; cp. Mt 5:19; Ro 2:14; Gal 3:10 (Dt 27:26); vs. 12 (cp. Lev 18:5).—Mt 7:24, 26; Lk 6:46; J 2:5; 8:44. ἐκεῖνο τὸ προσταχθὲν ἡμῖν ποιήσωμεν let us do what has been commanded us GMary 463, 27f (ParJer 6:9).—ὸ̔ ἐὰν φανηρώσῃ … ὁ θεός, τοῦτο ποιήσομεν GJs 8:2.—ἐξουσίαν ποιεῖν exercise authority Rv 13:12a.

ⓑ do, practice virtues (cp. SIG 304, 41f τὰ δίκαια): π. τὴν ἀλήθειαν (ἀλήθεια 2b) live the truth J 3:21 (cp. 1QS 1:5 al.); 1J 1:6. (τὴν) δικαιοσύνην (δικαιοσύνη 3a) 1J 2:29; 3:7, 10; Rv 22:11; 2 Cl 4:2; 11:7. τὰ ἐντολά Ro 22:14 v.l. (SGoranson, NTS 43, ’97, 154–57). Differently Mt 6:1 (δικαιοσύνη 3b), which belongs with ποιεῖν ἐλεημοσύνην vs. 2a and 3a (s. ἐλεημοσύνη 1); cp. Ac 9:36; 10:2; 24:17. π. ἐγκράτειαν 2 Cl 15:1. π. χρηστότητα Ro 3:12 (Ps 13:1, 3; 52:4 v.l.). π. ἔλεος show mercy Js 2:13; μετά τινος to someone Lk 1:72; 10:37a (JosAs 23:4; s. ἔλεος a and μετά A2γג).

ⓒ do, commit, be guilty of sins and vices (τὴν) ἁμαρτίαν (ἁμαρτία 1a) J 8:34; 2 Cor 11:7; 1 Pt 2:22; 1J 3:4a, 8, 9; pl. Js 5:15 (TestAbr B 10 p. 115, 10 [Stone p. 78, 10]). ἁμάρτημα (TestJob 11:3; ParJer 2:2; s. ἁμάρτημα) 1 Cor 6:18. (τὴν) ἀνομίαν (ἀνομία 2) Mt 13:41; 1J 3:4b; 1 Cl 16:10 (Is 53:9). βδέλυγμα καὶ ψεῦδος Rv 21:27. τὸ πονηρὸν τοῦτο GJs 13:1; cp. 13:2; 15:3f; ταῦτα 15:2. τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα Ro 1:28. ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔξεστιν Mk 2:24; cp. Mt 12:2.

ⓓ The manner of action is more definitely indicated by means of an adv. (Jos., C. Ap. 2, 51). καλῶς ποιεῖν do good or well Mt 12:12; 1 Cor 7:37, 38a (ApcMos 17). κρεῖσσον π. 7:38b; Js 2:8 (s. 5d below), 19; φρονίμως π. act wisely Lk 16:8; π. οὕτως do so (Chariton 8, 6, 4 ποιήσομεν οὕτως=this is the way we will proceed; JosAs 10:20; ApcMos 40; Mel., P. 13, 82) Mt 24:46; Lk 9:15; 12:43; J 14:31 (καθὼς … οὕτως π.); Ac 12:8; 1 Cor 16:1; Js 2:12; B 12:7; GJs 7:2. π. ὡσαύτως proceed in the same way Mt 20:5; ὁμοίως π. Lk 3:11; 10:37b. ὥσπερ οἱ ὑποκριταὶ ποιοῦσιν as the dissemblers do Mt 6:2b. καθὼς ποιεῖτε 1 Th 5:11.—ποιεῖν foll. by a clause beginning w. ὡς: ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν he did as (the angel) had ordered Mt 1:24; cp. 26:19. Or the clause begins w. καθώς Mt 21:6; J 13:15b (TestJob 7:9). For GJs 17:1 s. 5e.

ⓔ The manner of the action is more definitely indicated by a prepositional expr. ποιεῖν κατά τι do or act in accordance w. someth. (SIG 915, 13 π. κατὰ τὰς συνθήκας; 1016, 6; PLille 4, 6; 22 [III B.C.]; BGU 998 II, 12 [II B.C.] π. κατὰ τὰ προγεγραμμένα) κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν as they do Mt 23:3b.—Lk 2:27. Also π. πρός τι: πρὸς τὸ θέλημα 12:47.

④ to do someth. to others or someth., do someth. to/with, of behavior involving others, π. τι w. some indication of the pers. (or thing) with whom someth. is done; the action may result to the advantage or disadvantage of this person:

ⓐ neutral π. τί τινα do someth. with someone (double acc. as Demosth. 23, 194 τὶ ποιεῖν ἀγαθὸν τὴν πόλιν) τί ποιήσω Ἰησοῦν; what shall I do with Jesus? Mt 27:22. τί οὖν αὐτὴν ποιήσωμεν; what, then, shall I do about (Mary)? GJs 8:2; cp. 14:1; 17:1. τί ποιήσεις τὸν ἀγρόν; what will you do with the land? Hs 1:4 (ParJer 3:9 τί θέλει ποιήσω τὰ ἅγια σκεύη). Cp. Mk 15:12.—B-D-F §157, 1; Rob. 484.—Neutral is also the expr. π. τί τινι do someth. to someone J 9:26; 12:16; 13:12; Ac 4:16. Likew. the passive form of the familiar saying of Jesus ὡς ποιεῖτε, οὕτω ποιηθήσεται ὑμῖν as you do (whether it be good or ill), it will be done to you 1 Cl 13:2.

ⓑ to someone’s advantage: π. τί τινι (Diod S 18, 51, 3; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 19 [Stone p. 80]; ParJer 3:12; ApcMos 3): ὅσα ἐὰν θέλητε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι Mt 7:12a. τί θέλετε ποιήσω ὑμῖν; what do you want me to do for you? Mt 20:32.—25:40; cp. vs. 45; Mk 5:19f; 7:12; 10:35f, 51; Lk 1:49; 8:39ab; J 13:15a.—π. τι εἴς τινα 1 Th 4:10. π. τι μετά τινος (B-D-F §227, 3, add. reff. B-D-R) Ac 14:27; 15:4 (TestJob 1:4; on the constr. w. μετά s. 3b above and cp. BGU 798, 7; 948, 8).

ⓒ to someone’s disadvantage: π. τί τινι (Gen 20:9; JosAs 28:10 μὴ ποιήσητε αὐτοῖς κακόν; ApcMos 42) τί ποιήσει τοῖς γεωργοῖς; what will he do to the vine-dressers? Mt 21:40.—Mk 9:13; Lk 6:11; 20:15; Ac 9:13; Hb 13:6 (Ps 117:6); GJs 9:2.—π. τι εἴς τινα (PSI 64, 20; 22 [I B.C.] μηδὲ ποιήσειν εἰς σὲ φάρμακα) J 15:21. π. τι ἔν τινι Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31.

ⓓ w. dat. and adv. ἐποίησαν αὐτοῖς ὡσαύτως they treated them in the same way Mt 21:36. οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν κύριος the Lord has dealt thus with me Lk 1:25; cp. 2:48; Mt 18:35. εὖ ποιεῖν τινι Mk 14:7. καλῶς π. τινι Mt 5:44 v.l.; Lk 6:27. ὁμοίως π. τινι 6:31b.—In a condensed colloquialism (ποιεῖν) καθὼς ἐποίει αὐτοῖς (to do) as he was accustomed to do for them Mk 15:8 (s. εὐποιί̈α 1).

ⓔ w. dat. and prep. κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ ἐποίουν τοῖς προφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν Lk 6:23; cp. vs. 26.

⑤ do, make, with variations in specialized expressions

ⓐ get or gain someth. for oneself, provide oneself with someth. ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια Lk 12:33; φίλους 16:9 (cp. X., An. 5, 5, 12 φίλον ποιεῖσθαί τινα).—Without a dat. Ἰησοῦς μαθητὰς ποιεῖ Jesus was gaining disciples J 4:1.

ⓑ of mental construction assume, suppose, take as an example (Hdt. et al.) w. double acc. (Pla., Theaet. 197d) ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλόν suppose the tree is good Mt 12:33a; cp. vs. 33b.

ⓒ w. an acc. of time spend, stay (Anth. 11, 330; PSI 362, 15 [251/250 B.C.]; UPZ 70, 21; PFlor 137, 7 [III A.D.] ἡμέραν, ἥν ποιεῖ ἐκεῖ; PGen 54, 18 τρεῖς ἡμέρας; Pr 13:23; Ec 6:12; Tob. 10:7 BA; TestJob 20:5; 31:4; ParJer 6:16; ApcMos 37 ὥρας τρεῖς; Jos. Ant. 6, 18 μῆνας τέσσαρας; cp. our colloquial ‘do time’. Demosth. 19, 163 and Pla., Phileb. 50d are wrongly cited in this connection, as shown by WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 23f) χρόνον (Dionys. Hal. 4, 66; ParJer 7:33; ApcMos 31) Ac 15:33; 18:23. μῆνας τρεῖς 20:3. τρεῖς μῆνας GJs 12:3. νυχθήμερον 2 Cor 11:25. ἐνιαυτόν Js 4:13 (TestJob 21:1 ἔτη).

ⓓ καλῶς ποιεῖν w. ptc. foll. do well if, do well to, as a formula somet.= please (s. καλῶς 4a and cp. SIG 561, 6f καλῶς ποιήσειν τοὺς πολίτας προσδεξαμένους; UPZ 110, 11 [164 B.C.]; POxy 300, 5 [I A.D.]; 525, 7; Hdt. 5, 24 εὖ ἐποίησας ἀφικόμενος; SIG 598e, 8f) Ac 10:33; Phil 4:14; 2 Pt 1:19; 3J 6; GEg 252, 53.—Sim. καλῶς ποιεῖν, εἰ … Js 2:8 (cp. PPetr II, 11 [1], 1 καλῶς ποιεῖς εἰ ἔρρωσαι).

ⓔ αὕτη ἡ ἡμέρα κυρίου ποιήσει ὡς βούλεται this day of the Lord will turn out as (the Lord) wills GJs 17:1 (deStrycker cites Mt 6:34 for the construction); if the accentuation αὐτή is adopted, render: the day of the Lord shall itself bring things about as (the Lord) wills.

⑥ to be active in some way, work, be active, abs. (X., An. 1, 5, 8; Ruth 2:19) w. acc. of time (Socrat., Ep. 14, 8 ποιήσας ἡμέρας τριάκοντα) μίαν ὥραν ἐποίησαν they have worked for only one hour Mt 20:12a. ποιῆσαι μῆνας be active for months Rv 13:5.—Somet. it is not a general action or activity that is meant, but the doing of someth. quite definite. The acc. belonging to it is easily supplied fr. the context: λέγουσιν καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσιν they say (it), but do not do or keep (it) Mt 23:3c (the contrast is not betw. speaking [λαλεῖν] and acting in general).—2 Cor 8:10f (s. Betz, 2 Cor p. 64); 1 Th 5:24.

⑦ make/do someth. for oneself or of oneself mid.

ⓐ mostly as a periphrasis of the simple verbal idea (s. 2d) ἀναβολὴν ποιεῖσθαι Ac 25:17 (s. ἀναβολή). ἐκβολὴν ποιεῖσθαι 27:18 (s. ἐκβολή); αὔξησιν π. Eph 4:16; δέησιν or δεήσεις π. Lk 5:33; Phil 1:4; 1 Ti 2:1 (s. δέησις). διαλογισμοὺς π. 1 Cl 21:3; τὰς διδασκαλίας Papias (2:15); τὴν ἕνωσιν π. IPol 5:2; ἐπιστροφὴν π. 1 Cl 1:1 (ἐπιστροφή 1); καθαρισμὸν π. Hb 1:3 (καθαρισμός 2). κοινωνίαν Ro 15:26. κοπετόν Ac 8:2 v.l.; λόγον (Isocr., Ep. 2, 2; Just., D. 1, 3 al.) 1:1; 11:2 D; 20:24 v.l. (on these three passages s. λόγος: 1b; 1aγ and 1aα, end). μνείαν Ro 1:9; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4 (μνεία 2). μνήμην 2 Pt 1:15 (s. μνήμη 1). μονήν J 14:23 (μονή 1). νουθέτησιν 1 Cl 56:2 (Just., A I, 67, 4). ὁμιλίαν IPol 5:1 (ὁμιλία 2). ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν AcPlCor 2:28. πορείαν π. (=πορεύεσθαι; cp. X., An. 5, 6, 11, Cyr. 5, 2, 31; Plut., Mor. 571e; Jos., Vi. 57; 2 Macc 3:8; 12:10; Ar. 4, 2) Lk 13:22. πρόνοιαν π. make provision, care (Isocr. 4, 2 and 136; Demosth., Prooem. 16; Ps.-Demosth. 47, 80; Polyb. 4, 6, 11; Dion. Hal. 5, 46; Aelian, VH 12, 56. Oft. in ins and pap [esp. of civic-minded people]; Da 6:19 προν. ποιούμενος αὐτοῦ; Jos., Bell. 4, 317, C. Ap. 1, 9; Ar. 13, 2) Ro 13:14; Papias (2:15). προσκλίσεις π. 1 Cl 47:3; σπουδὴν π. be eager (Hdt. 1, 4; 5, 30 πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούμενος; 9, 8; Pla., Euthyd. 304e, Leg. 1, 628e; Isocr. 5, 45 πᾶσαν τὴν σπ.̀ περὶ τούτου ποιεῖσθαι; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 al.; Diod S 1, 75, 1; Plut., Mor. 4e; SIG 539A, 15f; 545, 14 τὴν πᾶσαν σπ.̀ ποιούμενος; PHib 71, 9 [III B.C.] τ. πᾶσαν σπ. ποίησαι; 44, 8) Jd 3. συνελεύσεις ποιεῖσθαι come together, meet 1 Cl 20:10 (Just., A I, 67, 7). συνωμοσίαν ποιεῖσθαι form a conspiracy (Polyb. 1, 70, 6; Herodian 7, 4, 3; SIG 526, 16) Ac 23:13.—Cp. use of the act. 2d.

ⓑ w. double acc., of the obj. and pred. (Lucian, Prom. Es in Verb. 6 σεμνοτάτας ἐποιεῖτο τὰς συνουσίας; GDI 4629, II, 22; 25 [Laconia]; Jos., Ant. 2, 263; s. 2hβ) βεβαίαν τὴν κλῆσιν ποιεῖσθαι make the calling certain 2 Pt 1:10. οὐδενὸς λόγου ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ I don’t consider my life as something of value for myself Ac 20:24. Cp. use of the act. 2hβ.—B. 538. Cp. πράσσω. Schmidt, Syn. I 397–423. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ποιέω

Страницы

← Предыдущая

Следующая →

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

См. также в других словарях:

Brought to Light — (ISBN 0 913035 67 X) is an anthology of two political graphic novels, published originally by Eclipse Comics in 1988. Both are based on material from lawsuits filed by the Christic Institute against the US Government. The two stories are… … Wikipedia

How Titus Pullo Brought Down the Republic — Rome episode title=How Titus Pullo Brought Down the Republic caption=Titus Pullo season=1 (2005) episode=2 (HBO; see BBC editing) air date=September 4, 2005 (HBO) November 2nd 9th, 2005 (BBC) ( see BBC editing ) writer=Bruno Heller… … Wikipedia

I Brought You My Bullets, You Brought Me Your Love — Studio album by My Chemical Romance … Wikipedia

The Day He Himself Shall Wipe My Tears Away — nihongo| The Day He Himself Shall Wipe My Tears Away |みずから我が涙をぬぐいたまう日|Mizukara Waga Namida o Nugui Tamau Hi is a novella by the Japanese author Oe Kenzaburo, first published in Japanese in 1972. It has been translated into English by John Nathan… … Wikipedia

The Ram has Touched the Wall — Rome episode title= The Ram Has Touched the Wall caption=Pompey mulls his options after truce is refused season=1 (2005) episode=5 (HBO; see BBC editing) air date=September 25, 2005 (HBO) November 23, 2005 (BBC) writer=Bruno Heller director=Allen … Wikipedia

This Hour Has Seven Days — was a controversial CBC Television newsmagazine which ran from 1964 to 1966. The show, inspired by the British satire series That Was The Week That Was , was created by Patrick Watson and Douglas Leiterman as an avenue for a more stimulating and… … Wikipedia

serve him right! — He has brought that upon himself! … A concise dictionary of English slang

Shakespeare, William — (baptized April 26, 1564, Stratford upon Avon, Warwickshire, Eng. died April 23, 1616, Stratford upon Avon) British poet and playwright, often considered the greatest writer in world literature. He spent his early life in Stratford upon Avon,… … Universalium

Gotrek and Felix — are a pair of characters in the Warhammer Fantasy setting; appearing in a series of novels written primarily by William King. The novels chronicle the adventurers of a Dwarven Slayer named Gotrek Gurnisson and his poet/insurrectionist companion,… … Wikipedia

Christianity — /kris chee an i tee/, n., pl. Christianities. 1. the Christian religion, including the Catholic, Protestant, and Eastern Orthodox churches. 2. Christian beliefs or practices; Christian quality or character: Christianity mixed with pagan elements; … Universalium

India — /in dee euh/, n. 1. Hindi, Bharat. a republic in S Asia: a union comprising 25 states and 7 union territories; formerly a British colony; gained independence Aug. 15, 1947; became a republic within the Commonwealth of Nations Jan. 26, 1950.… … Universalium

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

he+has+brought+it+on+himself

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

he+has+brought+it+on+himself

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: